2011 5seriessedan Ownersmanual

Owner's Manual for
Vehicle
Contents
A-Z
The Ultimate Driving
Machine
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2604541 - 03 10 500

535i Owner's Manual for Vehicle
550i Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you
will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.
Also use the integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐
tains important information on vehicle operation that will help you
make full use of the technical features available in your BMW. The
manual also contains information designed to enhance operating
reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the
value of your BMW.
Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐
chures in the onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable drive.
BMW AG

© 2010 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
English II/10, 03 10 500
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Contents
At a glance
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ Communication
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to 202 Telephone
page 266. 211 Contacts
214 BMW Assist
Using this Owner's Manual
Controls
6 Notes Mobility
222 Refueling
At a glance
223 Fuel
12 Cockpit
224 Wheels and tires
19 iDrive
231 Engine compartment
Driving tips
25 Voice activation system
233 Engine oil
27 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
235 Maintenance
Controls 237 Replacing components
32 Opening and closing 244 Breakdown assistance
46 Adjusting 249 Care
Navigation
57 Transporting children safely
Reference
60 Driving
254 Technical data
71 Displays
258 Short commands for voice activation
81 Lamps
system
86 Safety
266 Everything from A to Z
Communication Entertainment
96 Driving stability control systems
102 Driving comfort
126 Climate control
132 Interior equipment
138 Storage compartments
Driving tips
144 Things to remember when driving
Navigation
152 Navigation
Entertainment
170 Tone
172 Radio
Mobility
179 CD/multimedia
194 Rear entertainment
Reference

Notes
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual Your individual vehicle

The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ You have decided in favor of a vehicle with indi‐
ular topic is by using the index. vidualized equipment and features.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in This Owner's Manual describes the entire array
the first chapter. of options and equipment available for a specific
model.
Additional sources of information As a result, the manual may contain accessories
Should you have any questions, your service and equipment that you may not have specified
center will be glad to advise you at any time. for your own vehicle.
Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is All options and special equipment are marked
available on the Internet: bmwusa.com. with an asterisk *.
For options and equipment not described in this
Owner's Manual, please refer to the Supple‐
Symbols mentary Owner's Manuals.
Indicates precautions that must be followed On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls are
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of per‐ arranged differently than shown in the illustra‐
sonal injury and serious damage to the vehicle. tions.
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of informa‐
tion.
* Indicates special equipment, country-specific
Status at publication
equipment and optional accessories, as well as The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a pol‐
equipment and functions not yet available at the icy of constant development that is conceived
time of printing. to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to se‐ the highest quality and safety standards. In rare
lect individual functions. cases, therefore, the features described in this
Owner's Manual may differ from those in your
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice ac‐
vehicle.
tivation system.
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system. For your own safety
Refers to measures that can be taken to help
protect the environment. Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern
Symbols on vehicle components materials and high-performance electronics, re‐
Recommends that you study the relevant quires suitable maintenance and repair meth‐
section of this Owner's Manual in connection ods.
with a particular part or assembly. Therefore, have this work performed only by a
BMW center or a workshop that works accord‐
ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri‐
ately trained personnel.
6
If this work is not carried out properly, there is from all BMW centers. Installation and operation
At a glance
the danger of subsequent damage and related of non-BMW approved accessories such as
safety hazards. alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors,
wheels, suspension components, brake dust
Parts and accessories shields, telephones, including operation of any
BMW recommends using parts and accessories mobile phone from within the vehicle without
approved by BMW for this purpose. using an externally mounted antenna, or trans‐
ceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie-
Your BMW center is the right contact for genu‐
talkies, ham radios or similar accessories, may
Controls
ine BMW parts and accessories, other products
cause extensive damage to the vehicle, com‐
approved by BMW and related qualified advice.
promise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's
BMW has tested these products for safety and electrical system or affect the validity of the
suitability in relation to BMW vehicles. BMW Limited Warranty. See your BMW center
BMW can assume responsibility for them. How‐ for additional information. Maintenance, re‐
Driving tips
ever, we cannot assume any responsibility placement, or repair of the emission control de‐
whatsoever for parts and accessories that have vices and systems may be performed by any au‐
not been specifically approved by BMW. tomotive repair establishment or individual
BMW cannot evaluate whether each individual using any certified automotive part.
product from another manufacturer can be used
with BMW vehicles without presenting a safety California Proposition 65 Warning
hazard. This guarantee is also not applicable California laws require us to state the following
Navigation
when country-specific government approval warning:
has been granted. Testing of this kind may fail Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile
to embrace the entire range of potential operat‐ components and parts, including components
ing conditions to which components might be found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, con‐
exposed on BMW vehicles. Such products tain or emit chemicals known to the State of Cal‐
could conceivably fail to comply with BMW's ifornia to cause cancer and birth defects and re‐
own stringent quality standards. productive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
Parts and Accessories component wear contain or emit chemicals
For your own safety, use genuine parts and ac‐ known to the State of California to cause cancer
cessories approved by BMW. When you pur‐ and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
chase accessories tested and approved by Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
BMW and Genuine BMW Parts, you simultane‐ contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your
ously acquire the assurance that they have been hands after handling. Used engine oil contains
thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure optimum chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory
performance when installed on your vehicle. animals. Always protect your skin by washing
BMW warrants these parts to be free from de‐ thoroughly with soap and water.
fects in material and workmanship. BMW will not
accept any liability for damage resulting from in‐ Service and warranty
stallation of parts and accessories not approved We recommend that you read this publication
Mobility
by BMW. BMW cannot test every product made thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
by other manufacturers to verify if it can be used lowing warranties:
on a BMW safely and without risk to either the
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty
vehicle, its operation, or its occupants. Genuine
BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and other prod‐ ▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
ucts approved by BMW, together with profes‐ ▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty
Reference
sional advice on using these items, are available
7
Notes ▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty rcar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
▷ California Emission Control System Limited Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
Warranty You can also obtain other information about mo‐
tor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
For Canadian customers
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone
designed to meet the particular operating con‐
the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510, or contact
ditions and homologation requirements in your
Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Canada,
country and continental region in order to deliver
ASFAD, Place de Ville Tower C, 330 Sparks
the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is op‐
Street, Ottawa ON K1A 0N5.
erated under those conditions. If you wish to op‐
erate your vehicle in another country or region,
you may be required to adapt your vehicle to
meet different prevailing operating conditions
and homologation requirements. You should
also be aware of any applicable warranty limita‐
tions or exclusions for such country or region. In
such case, please contact Customer Relations
for further information.
Reporting safety defects

For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the Na‐
tional Highway Traffic Safety Administration
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safe‐
8
9
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
10
At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and
displays are intended to familiarize you with your
vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted
with the available control concepts and options.
11
Cockpit
Cockpit
All around the steering wheel
1 Seating comfort functions* Night Vision with pedestrian de‐

Seat, mirror, steering wheel mem‐ tection* 121
ory* 53
Head-up Display* 124
Active seat* 48
7 Lamps
2 Roller sunblinds* 44 Front fog lamps 84
3 Safety switch for the rear windows and roller
sunblinds* 44
Parking lamps 81
4 Power windows 43
5 Exterior mirror operation 54
Low beams 81
6 Driver assistance systems*
Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion* 94 Automatic headlamp con‐
trol* 82
Collision warning* 107 Daytime running lights* 82
High-beam assistant* 83
Lane departure warning* 93 Instrument lighting 84
8 Steering column stalk, left
12
Turn signal 63 Voice activation* 25
At a glance
High beams, head‐ Telephone* 202
lamp flasher 63
High-beam assistant* 83 12 Steering column stalk, right

Windshield wipers 64
Controls
Roadside parking lamps 82
Rain sensor* 64
Computer* 74
Clean the windshields and head‐
Driving tips
lamps* 64
9 Steering wheel buttons, left
Store speed* 110, 103 13 Start/stop the engine and switch
the ignition on/off 60
Resume speed 110, 104
14 Horn
15 Steering wheel heating* 56
Navigation
Cruise control on/off, inter‐
rupt 109, 102
16 Adjust the steering wheel 55
Increase distance* 104
Decrease distance* 103 17 Open the trunk lid 38
10 Instrument cluster 14 18 Unlock the hood
11 Steering wheel buttons, right

Entertainment source
Volume
Mobility
Reference
13
Instrument cluster
Cockpit
1 Fuel gauge 73 6 Electronic displays 16

2 Speedometer 7 External temperature, clock 71
3 Indicator/warning lamps 14 8 Miles, trip miles 71
4 Tachometer 72 9 Reset miles 71
5 Engine oil temperature 72
Indicator/warning lamps Overview: indicator/warning lamps
Instrument cluster Symbol Function or system
Turn signal
Parking brake
Automatic Hold
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in Front fog lamps*
a variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lamps are checked for proper
High beams
functioning when the engine is started or the ig‐
nition is switched on, and light up briefly in the
process.
14
Symbol Function or system Symbol Function or system
At a glance
High-beam Assistant* Steering system
Parking lamps, headlamp control Engine functions
Active Cruise Control* Brake system
Controls
Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Brake system in Canadian models
Control*
Driving tips
Cruise control* Antilock Brake System ABS
Lane departure warning* Antilock Brake System ABS in Cana‐

dian models
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
Navigation
Text messages
Text messages in combination with a symbol in
DSC Dynamic Stability Control or the instrument cluster explain a Check Control
DTC Dynamic Traction Control message and the meaning of the indicator and
warning lamps.
Tire Pressure Monitor
Flat Tire Monitor Supplementary text messages
Additional information on the Control Display,
Safety belts e.g., on the cause of a malfunction or the re‐
quired action, can be called up via Check Con‐
trol, refer to page 79.
Airbag system
The text of urgent messages is displayed auto‐
matically.
Mobility
Reference
15
Instrument cluster, electronic displays
Cockpit
1 Selection list, e.g., radio 73 Computer 73

Navigation display 152 2 Transmission displays 68
3 Service display 78
Messages, e.g., warnings 14
16
All around the center console
At a glance
Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
1 Headliner 18 10 PDC Park Distance Con‐
2 Control Display 19 trol* 111
3 Glove compartment 138 Top View* 115
4 Air vent 129 Backup camera* 113
5 Hazard warning system 244 Parking assistant* 118
Side View* 117
Central locking system 38

11 Dynamic Driving Control* 98
6 Radio 172
CD/Multimedia 179 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 96
7 Automatic climate control 126
8 Controller with buttons 19 12 Transmission selector lever
9 Parking brake 62
Auto Hold* 62
Mobility
Reference
17
All around the headliner
Cockpit
1 Emergency Request* 244 4 Reading lamps* 85
2 Glass sunroof, powered* 44 5 Interior lamps 84
3 Indicator lamp, front passenger

airbag* 88
18
iDrive
At a glance
The concept Switching off
The iDrive combines the functions of a multitude 1. Press the button.

of switches. Thus, these functions can be oper‐
2. "Switch off control display"
ated from a central location.
Controls
Using the iDrive during a trip
To avoid becoming distracted and posing
an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occu‐
pants and to other road users, never attempt to
use the controls or enter information unless traf‐
Driving tips
fic and road conditions allow this.◀
Controls at a glance
Switching on
Controls Press the controller again to switch the screen
Navigation
back on.
Controller
Select menu items and create settings.
1. Turn.
1 Control Display
2 Controller with buttons
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and create the settings.
Control Display 2. Press.
Notes
▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the care
instructions, refer to page 251.
Mobility
▷ Do not place objects close to the Control

Display; otherwise, the Control Display can
be damaged.
Reference
19
iDrive 3. Move in four directions. All iDrive functions can be called up via the main
menu.
Selecting menu items

Menu items shown in white can be selected.
1. Turn the controller until the desired menu

item is highlighted.
Buttons on controller
Press the button Function
MENU Opens the main menu.
RADIO Opens the Radio menu.

2. Press the controller.
CD Opens the CD/Multimedia
menu. Menu items in the Owner's Manual
NAV Opens the Navigation map In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
view. selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
"Settings".
TEL Opens the Telephone
menu. Changing between panels
BACK Displays the previous After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a
panel. new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.
OPTION Opens the Options menu. ▷ Move the controller to the left.
The current panel is closed and the previous
panel is displayed.
Operating concept The previous panel is opened again by

pressing the BACK button. In this case, the
Opening the main menu current panel is not closed.
Press the button. ▷ Move the controller to the right.
A new panel is opened on top of the previous
display.
The main menu is displayed.
20
White arrows pointing to the left or right indicate 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
At a glance
that additional panels can be opened. is displayed.
View of an opened menu

When a menu is opened, it generally opens with
the panel that was last selected in that menu. To
display the first panel of a menu:
▷ Move the controller to the left repeatedly
Controls
until the first panel is displayed.
▷ Press the menu button on the controller
twice.
Opening the Options menu
Driving tips
Press the button. Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
The "Options" menu is displayed. box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
activates or deactivates the function.
The function is activated.
Navigation
The function is deactivated.
Example: setting the clock

Setting the clock
Additional options: move the controller to the
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is dis‐ 1. Press the button. The main menu is
played. displayed.
2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐
Options menu lighted, and then press the controller.
The "Options" menu consists of various areas:
▷ Screen settings, for instance. "Split
screen".
This area remains unchanged.
▷ Control options for the selected main menu,
e.g., for "Radio".
▷ If applicable, further operating options for
the selected menu, e.g., "Store station".
Mobility
3. If necessary, move the controller to the left

Changing settings to display "Time/Date".
1. Select a field.
Reference
21
Radio symbols
iDrive 4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
Symbol Meaning
Traffic bulletins* switched on. One of

the symbols is displayed.
HD Radio* switched on.
Satellite radio* switched on
Telephone symbols
5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐
Symbol Meaning
lighted, and then press the controller.
Incoming or outgoing call*
Missed call*
Wireless network reception

strength*. Symbol flashes: network
search
Wireless network not available*
Bluetooth* activated
6. Turn the controller to set the hours and Roaming* is active
press the controller.
Text message received*
7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller. Check SIM card*
SIM card* blocked

Status information SIM card* missing
Status field Enter PIN*
The following information is displayed in the sta‐

tus field at the top right: Entertainment symbols
▷ Time.
Symbol Meaning
▷ Current entertainment source.
▷ Sound output, on/off. CD/DVD* player
▷ Wireless network reception strength. Music collection*

▷ Telephone status. Gracenote® database*
▷ Traffic bulletin reception.
AUX-IN port
Status field symbols Rear AUX-IN port*
The symbols are grouped as follows.
Rear AUX-IN port on the right*
USB audio interface*
22
Additional symbols Programmable memory
At a glance
buttons
Symbol Meaning
Spoken instructions* switched off General information

The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
Request current vehicle position*
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐
tions, phone numbers and entry points into the
Controls
Split screen* menu.
The settings are stored for the remote control
General information currently in use.
Additional information can be displayed on the
right side of the split screen, e.g., information Saving a function
Driving tips
from the computer. 1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even 2. Press the desired button for more
when you change to another menu. than 2 seconds.
Switching the split screen on and off Running a function
Navigation
Press the button.
1. Press the button.
The function will run immediately. This
2. "Split screen" means, for example, that the number is dialed
when a phone number is selected.
Selecting the display
Displaying the button assignment
Use a finger to touch the buttons. Do not wear
2. "Split screen"
gloves or use objects.
3. Move the controller until the split screen is
The key assignment is displayed at the top edge
selected.
of the screen.
4. "Split screen content"
5. Select the desired menu item.
Mobility
▷ To display short information: touch the but‐

ton.
▷ To display detailed information: touch the
button for an extended period.
Reference
23
Deleting the button assignments Entry comparison
iDrive
1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for Entry of names and addresses: the selection is
approx. five seconds. narrowed down every time a letter is entered and
2. "OK" letters may be added automatically.
The entries are continuously compared to the
data stored in the vehicle.
Entering letters and numbers ▷ Only those letters are offered during the en‐
try for which data is available.
1. Turn the controller: select letters or num‐
▷ Destination search: town/city names can be
bers.
entered using the spelling of language avail‐
2. Select additional letters or numbers if able on the Control Display.
needed.
3. "OK": confirm the entry.
Symbol Function
Press the controller: delete the letter

or number.
Press the controller for an extended

period: delete all letters or numbers.
Enter a blank space.
Switching between letters and

numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering letters and numbers:
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
Switching between upper and lower

case letters
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case letters:
Symbol Function
Move the controller up: switch

from upper to lower case letters.
Move the controller up: switch

from lower to upper case letters.
24
Voice activation system*
At a glance
The concept Possible commands
▷ The voice activation system can be used to
Having possible commands read aloud
operate equipment by means of spoken
commands. The commands available in each case depend
on the menu item selected on the Control Dis‐
Controls
▷ The system encompasses special micro‐
play.
phones on the outer edge of the headliner.
Have the available spoken instructions read
▷ Most menu items on the Control Display can
aloud using ›Voice commands‹.
be voiced as commands. The system
prompts you to make your entries. If, for example, ›Settings‹ is selected, the com‐
mands to the settings are read aloud.
Driving tips
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's Man‐
ual to use with the voice activation system.
Executing functions using short
commands
Functions on the main menu can be performed
Requirements directly by means of short commands, irrespec‐
On the Control Display, set the language to be tive of which menu item is currently selected,
Navigation
used with the voice activation system to enable e. g., ›Vehicle status‹.
the system to identify the voice commands. List of short voice activation commands, refer to
Set the language, refer to page 77. page 258.
Using voice activation Example: playing back a CD
Activating the voice activation system 1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output
if necessary.
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel. 2. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Say the command.
3. ›C D and multimedia‹
The command is displayed in the instrument
cluster. The medium last played is played back.
This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is active. 4. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
If no further commands are available, continue
operating the equipment via the iDrive. 5. ›C D track ... ‹ e.g., CD track 4.
Terminating the voice activation

Mobility
system Setting the voice dialog

Briefly press the button on the steering wheel You can set whether the system should use the
or ›Cancel‹. standard dialog or a shorter version.
In the shorter version of the voice dialog, the
prompts and responses from the system are ab‐
Reference
breviated.
25
Voice activation system On the Control Display: ▷ When selecting a radio station, use the com‐
mon pronunciation of the station name.
1. "Settings"
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sunroof
2. "Language/Units"
closed to prevent noise interference.
3. "Speech mode:"
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
4. Select the setting. while speaking.
Adjusting the volume

Turn the volume button while giving an instruc‐
tion until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Notes on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to initiate
an Emergency Request. In stressful situations,
the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can
unnecessarily delay the establishment of a tel‐
ephone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button*, refer to
page 244, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
26
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
At a glance
Owner's Manual in the vehicle Leaf forward.
The Owner's Manual can be displayed on the
Control Display in accordance with the equip‐
ment selected. Context-sensitive help - section of the
Controls
Owner's Manual referring to the
Methods of opening the Owner's present function
Manual The relevant information can be opened directly.
The following methods are available:
▷ Quick reference: "Quick reference" Opening via the iDrive
Driving tips
▷ Key word search: "Owner's Manual" To move directly from the application on the
Control Display to the options menu:
▷ Using pictures: "Search by pictures"
1. Press the button. 1. Press the button or move the controller

to the right repeatedly until the "Options"
2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle Info".
menu is displayed.
Navigation
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
4. Select "Quick reference", "Search by
pictures" or "Owner's Manual". Opening when a Check Control
message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on the
Control Display:
"Display Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the

Owner's Manual
To change from a function, e.g., radio, to the
Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to
switch between the two displays:
Leafing through the Owner's Manual
Page by page with link access 1. Press the button or move the controller
to the right repeatedly until the "Options"
Turn the controller until the next or previous
menu is displayed.
page is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
Page by page without link access 3. Select the desired page in the Owner's Man‐
Leaf through the pages directly while skipping ual.
Mobility
the links.
Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press 4. Press the button again to return to the
the controller to leaf from page to page. function displayed last.
Leaf back. 5. Press the button to return to the page

of the Owner's Manual displayed last.
Reference
27
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle To switch back and forth repeatedly between
the function displayed last and the page of the
Owner's Manual displayed last, repeat steps 4
and 5. This opens a new panel every time.
Programmable memory buttons
General information
The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons, refer to page 23,
and called up directly.
Storing
1. Select "Owner's Manual" via the iDrive.
2. Press the desired button for more

than 2 seconds.
Executing
Press the button.
The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐
mediately.
28
29
30
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information that will give you complete control of
your vehicle. All features and accessories that are
useful for driving and your safety, comfort and
convenience are described here.
31
Opening and closing
Opening and closing
Remote control/key Integrated key
Buttons on the remote control
Press the button on the back of the remote con‐

trol, arrow 1, and pull out the key, arrow 2.
1 Releasing The integrated key fits the following locks:
2 Locking ▷ Driver's door.
3 Trunk lid ▷ Storage compartment in the front center
4 Panic mode*, headlamp courtesy delay armrest.
The storage compartment contains a switch for
General information separately securing the trunk lid, refer to
The vehicle is supplied with two remote controls page 40.
with keys.
Replacing the battery
Every remote control contains a replaceable
battery.
The settings called up and implemented when
the vehicle is unlocked depend on which remote
control is used to unlock the vehicle, Personal
Profile, refer to page 33.
In addition, information about service require‐
ments is stored in the remote control, Service
data in the remote control, refer to page 235.
1. Take the integrated key out of the remote

control.
2. Push in the catch with the key, arrow 1.
3. Remove the cover of the battery compart‐
ment; see arrow 2.
4. Insert a battery of the same type with the
positive side facing upwards.
5. Press the cover closed.
Take the used battery to a recycling cen‐
ter or to your service center.
32
New remote controls ▷ The remote control used is detected when
At a glance
You can obtain new remote controls from your the vehicle is unlocked and the stored profile
service center. is called up.
▷ Your personal settings will be recognized
Loss of the remote controls and called up again even if the vehicle has
Lost remote controls can be blocked by your been used in the meantime by someone else
service center. with another remote control.
The individual settings are stored for up to three
Controls
Emergency detection of remote control remote controls.
It is possible to switch on the ignition or start the
engine in situations such as the following: Transmitting the settings
▷ Remote control malfunction. Your personal settings can be taken with you to
another vehicle equipped with the Personal Pro‐
▷ Interference of radio transmission to remote
Driving tips
file function. For more information, contact your
control by external sources.
service center.
▷ Discharged battery in the remote control.
Transmission takes place via:
A message is displayed on the Control Display
▷ The USB interface in the glove compart‐
if an attempt is made to switch on the ignition or
ment onto a USB device.
start the engine.
Profile management
Navigation
Starting the engine in case of
emergency detection of remote control
Opening the profiles
A different profile can be called up than the one
associated with the remote control currently in
use.
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
If a corresponding message appears on the

Control Display, as shown, hold the remote con‐
trol against the marked area on the steering col‐
umn and press the Start/Stop button within
10 seconds while depressing the brake.
3. Select a profile.
Personal Profile
Renaming profiles
Mobility
The concept 1. "Settings"

You can set several of your vehicle's functions
2. "Profiles"
to suit your personal needs and preferences.
The current profile is selected.
▷ The settings are automatically saved in the
profile currently activated. 3. Open "Options".
Reference
33
Opening and closing 4. "Rename current profile" 2. "Profiles"
3. "Export profile"
4. USB interface, refer to page 138: "USB
device"
Display profile list during start

The profile list can be displayed during each
start for selecting the desired profile.
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
Resetting profiles 3. "Options"
The settings of the active profile are reset to 4. "Display user list at startup"
their default values.
1. "Settings" Personal Profile settings

2. "Profiles" The following functions and settings can be
stored in a profile.
The current profile is selected.
More information on the settings can be found
3. Open "Options".
under:
4. "Reset current profile"
▷ Active Cruise Control: collision warning, re‐
fer to page 107.
Importing profiles
▷ Exterior mirror position, refer to page 54.
Existing settings and contacts are overwritten
with the imported profile. ▷ CD/Multimedia, refer to page 179: audio
source listened to last.
1. "Settings"
▷ Dynamic Driving Control: sport program, re‐
2. "Profiles" fer to page 99.
3. "Import profile" ▷ Driver's seat position, refer to page 46.
▷ Programmable memory buttons, refer to
page 23: assignment.
▷ Head-up Display, refer to page 124: selec‐
tion, brightness and position of display.
▷ Headlamp courtesy delay feature, refer to
page 81: time setting.
▷ Tone, refer to page 170: tone settings.
▷ Automatic climate control, refer to
4. USB interface, refer to page 138: "USB page 126: settings.
device" ▷ Steering wheel position, refer to page 55
▷ Navigation, refer to page 152: map views,
Exporting profiles route criteria, voice output on/off.
Most settings of the active profile and the saved ▷ Night Vision with pedestrian detection, refer
contacts can be exported. to page 121: selection of functions and type
1. "Settings" of display.
34
▷ Daytime running lights*, refer to page 82: ▷ Anti-theft protection is switched on/off.
At a glance
current setting. Doors cannot be unlocked using the lock
▷ Park Distance Control PDC, refer to buttons or the door opener.
page 171: adjusting the signal tone volume. ▷ The welcome lamps, interior lamps and
▷ Radio, refer to page 172: stored stations, courtesy lamps* are switched on and off.
station listened to last, special settings. ▷ The alarm system*, refer to page 41, is
▷ Backup camera, refer to page 113: selec‐ armed or disarmed.
tion of functions and type of display.
Controls
Operating from the inside
▷ Side View, refer to page 117: selection of
the display type.
▷ Language on the Control Display, refer to
page 77.
Driving tips
▷ Lane departure warning, refer to page 93:
last setting, on/off.
▷ Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to
page 94: last setting, on/off.
▷ Triple turn signal activation, refer to
page 64. Via the button for the central locking system.
▷ Locking the vehicle, refer to page 38: after
Navigation
If the vehicle has been locked from inside, the
a brief period or after starting to drive.
fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
central locking system unlocks automatically.
Central locking system
The hazard warning system and interior lamps
The concept come on.
The central locking system becomes active
when the driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and re‐
Opening and closing: from the
leases the locks on the following: outside
▷ Doors.
Using the remote control
▷ Trunk lid.
▷ Fuel filler flap. General information
Take the remote control with you
Operating from the outside People or animals left unattended in a
▷ Via the remote control. parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐
▷ Via the driver's door lock. side. Always take the remote control with you
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can
▷ Via the door handles*.
Mobility
then be opened from the outside.◀

▷ Via the button in the trunk lid*.
The following takes place simultaneously when Unlocking
locking/unlocking the vehicle via the remote Press the button.
control:
The vehicle is unlocked.
Reference
You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked.
35
Opening and closing The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ with the vehicle locked.
rently in use.
1. "Settings" Panic mode*

2. "Door locks" You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
3. "Unlock button:"
Press the button on the remote control
for at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Switching on the headlamp courtesy

delay feature
Briefly press the button on the remote
control.
The duration, refer to page 81, can be set in

4. Select the desired function:
the Control Display.
▷ "Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler Opening the trunk lid
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐ Press the button on the remote control
locks the entire vehicle. for approx. 1 second.
▷ "All doors"
The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether it was
The entire vehicle is unlocked. previously locked or unlocked.
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and up.
Convenient opening
Ensure that adequate clearance is available be‐
The remote control can be used to simultane‐
fore opening.
ously open the windows and the glass sunroof*.
To avoid locking yourself out of the vehicle, do
Press and hold the button on the re‐ not place the remote control into the trunk. The
mote control. trunk lid is locked again as soon as it is pushed
The windows and the glass sunroof* open. closed.
Releasing the button stops the motion.

Confirmation signals from the vehicle
Locking 1. "Settings"
Press the button on the remote control. 2. "Door locks"

3. Deactivate or activate the desired confirma‐
Locking from the outside tion signals.
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if ▷ "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock"
there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be
unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
edge.◀
Switching on the interior lamps,

courtesy lamps*, and welcome lamps
36
▷ "Flash when lock/unlock" Using the door lock
At a glance
General information
Controls
Malfunction
Local radio waves may interfere with the remote Locking from the outside
Driving tips
control. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or un‐ there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be
locked with the remote control, the battery is unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
discharged. Replace the battery, refer to edge.◀
page 32. Remove the key before pulling the door
If this occurs, unlock or lock the vehicle at the handle
door lock using the key.
Navigation
Before pulling the outside door handle, remove
the key to avoid damaging the paintwork and the
For US owners only key.◀
The transmitter and receiver units comply with In some country-specific versions, the alarm
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication system*, refer to page 41, is triggered if the
Commission regulations. Operation is governed
vehicle is unlocked via the door lock.
by the following:
Unlock the vehicle using the remote control to
FCC ID: switch off the alarm.
▷ LX8766S.
▷ LX8766E. Convenient operation*
▷ LX8CAS. The door lock can be used to simultaneously
▷ LX8CAS2. operate the windows and the glass sunroof*.
▷ MYTCAS4.
Opening/closing
Compliance statement:
With the door closed, turn the key to the Unlock
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC or Lock position and hold it there.
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
Turning the key back to the original position
conditions:
stops the motion.
▷ This device may not cause harmful interfer‐
ence, and Monitor the closing process
Mobility
▷ this device must accept any interference re‐ Monitor the closing process to ensure that
ceived, including interference that may no one becomes trapped; otherwise, injuries
cause undesired operation. may result.◀
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to

these devices could void the user's authority to
Reference
operate this equipment.
37
Manual operation
Opening and closing The vehicle locks automatically after
If an electrical malfunction occurs, lock or unlock you drive away.
the vehicle using a key via the door lock on the
driver's door.
Opening and closing: from the

inside
Doors
Automatic Soft Closing
To close the doors, push lightly.
It is closed automatically.
Locking and unlocking
Danger of pinching
Press the button in the vehicle.
Make sure that the closing path of the
The doors and the trunk lid are locked doors is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
or unlocked when the front doors are closed, but
they are not secured against theft.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked. Trunk lid

You can set how the vehicle should be unlocked;
refer to Unlocking, refer to page 35. Opening
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and up.
Automatic locking Ensure that adequate clearance is available be‐
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ fore opening.
rently in use.
Opening from the outside
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. Select the desired function:
▷ "Lock if no door is opened"
The vehicle locks automatically after a
short period of time if a door is not
opened.
▷ "Lock after start. to drive"
▷ Press the button on the trunk lid.

▷ Press the button on the remote
control for approx. 1 second.
38
Opening from the inside
At a glance
Push the button in the driver's footwell.
If the vehicle is stationary, the trunk lid opens if

it is not locked.
Closing
Controls
▷ Press the button on the exterior of the trunk
lid.
▷ Press the button on the remote
control or in the driver's footwell.
Driving tips
Pressing the button again stops the motion.
The opening process is interrupted as well:
▷ When the vehicle starts moving.
Recessed grips in the interior trim of the trunk ▷ By pressing the button in the driver's foot‐
lid make it easier to pull down the lid. well.
Danger of pinching ▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
Navigation
Make sure that the closing path of the trunk lid.
trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may re‐
sult.◀ Closing
Locking the vehicle*
▷ Press the button on the inside of the trunk
lid.
Press the button on the inside of the trunk lid. The trunk lid closes automatically.
The vehicle is locked completely. Pressing again stops the motion.
Automatic trunk lid operation*

Mobility
Opening
The trunk lid opens fully.
Reference
39
Locking separately
Opening and closing
The trunk lid can be locked separately using the
switch in the front center armrest.
▷ Trunk lid secured, arrow 1.
▷ Trunk lid not secured, ar‐
row 2.
With Comfort Access: Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position. This
secures the trunk lid and disconnects it from the
▷ Press the button, arrow 1, on the inside of
central locking system.
the trunk lid.
When the center armrest is locked, the tailgate
The trunk lid closes automatically.
cannot be accessed. This is beneficial when the
Pressing again stops the motion. vehicle is parked using valet service. The infra‐
▷ Press the button, arrow 2. red remote control can be handed out without
The trunk lid closes automatically and the the key.
vehicle is locked.
Emergency unlocking*
▷ Press the button on the exterior of the trunk

lid. Pull the handle inside the trunk.
Pressing again stops the motion. The trunk lid unlocks.
▷ Press and hold the button on the

remote control.
Releasing the button stops the motion.
Comfort Access*
The closing process is not interrupted when the The concept
vehicle starts moving.
The vehicle can be accessed without activating
Danger of pinching the remote control.
Make sure that the closing path of the All you need to do is to have the remote control
trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may re‐ with you, e.g., in your jacket pocket.
sult.◀ The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is nearby or in the passenger
Manual operation compartment.
In the event of an electrical fault, manually op‐ Comfort Access supports the following func‐
erate the unlocked trunk lid slowly and tions:
smoothly.
▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
40
▷ Unlocking of the trunk lid separately. sumers are switched off before locking the ve‐
At a glance
▷ Starting the engine. hicle.
Functional requirements Unlocking the trunk lid separately

▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control must Press the button on the exterior of the trunk lid,
be located outside of the vehicle. refer to page 38.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not This corresponds to pressing the button.
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
Controls
▷ The engine can only be started if the remote Ignition on
control is inside the vehicle. Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ig‐
nition on.
Comparison with ordinary remote When doing so, do not depress the brake pedal;
control otherwise, the engine will start.
Driving tips
The functions can be controlled by pressing the
buttons or via Comfort Access. Malfunction
Comfort Access may not function properly if it
Unlocking experiences interference from local radio waves,
e.g., mobile phones.
If this occurs, open or close the vehicle using the
Navigation
buttons on the remote control or use a key in the
door lock.
To subsequently start the engine, hold the re‐
mote control against the marked area on the
steering column, refer to page 33.
Fully grasp a door handle, arrow 1. This corre‐ Alarm system*
sponds to pressing the button.
The concept
Locking The vehicle alarm system responds to:
▷ Opening of a door, the hood or the trunk lid.
▷ Movements in the vehicle: interior motion
sensor, refer to page 42.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at‐
tempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.
▷ Interruptions in battery voltage.
The alarm system briefly indicates tampering:
▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm.
Mobility
Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2, with ▷ By switching on the hazard warning system.
your finger for approx. 1 second.
▷ By flashing the high beams.
This corresponds to pressing the button.
To save battery power, ensure that the ignition
and all electronic systems and/or power con‐
Reference
41
Arming and disarming the alarm Indicator lamp on the interior rearview
Opening and closing
system mirror
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with
the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm
system is armed or disarmed at the same time.
Door lock and armed alarm system

Unlocking via the door lock will trigger the alarm
on some country-specific versions.
This alarm can only be ended by pressing the
button on the remote control.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every
Trunk lid and armed alarm system 2 seconds:
The trunk lid can be opened using the remote The system is armed.
control, even if the alarm system is armed. ▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
▷ Press the button on the remote The doors, hood or trunk lid is not closed
control for approx. 1 second. properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se‐
After the trunk lid is closed, it is locked and cured.
monitored again by the alarm system. The haz‐ After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp flashes
ard warning system flashes once. continuously. The interior motion sensor is
not active.
Panic mode*
▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
for at least 3 seconds.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the engine is started, but no longer than
Switching off the alarm
approx. 5 minutes:
▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote control.
An alarm has been triggered.
▷ Unlock the vehicle via the driver's door lock
using the key*. Tilt alarm sensor
▷ With Comfort Access: If you are carrying the The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
remote control with you, pull on the door
The alarm system responds in situations such
handle.
as attempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.
Interior motion sensor

The windows and glass sunroof must be closed
for the system to function properly.
Avoiding unintentional alarms

The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
can be switched off together, such as in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on car-carrying trains, at
sea or on a trailer.
42
▷ When animals are to remain in the vehicle. Monitor the closing process and make sure that
At a glance
the closing path of the window is clear; other‐
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and wise, injuries may result.◀
interior motion sensor
Press the button on the remote control ▷ Pull the switch to the resistance point.
twice in succession. The window closes while the switch is held.
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then flashes continuously. ▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance
Controls
point.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
are switched off until the vehicle is locked again. The window closes automatically.
Pressing the switch stops the motion.
Convenience operation, refer to page 36, via the
Power windows remote control or the door lock.
Driving tips
General information Pinch protection system
Take the remote control with you If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a
Take the remote control with you when window closes, the closing action is interrupted.
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example, The window reopens slightly.
cannot operate the power windows and injure
Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐
Navigation
themselves.◀
tection
Even with the pinch protection system, check
that the window's closing path is clear; other‐
wise, the closing action may not stop in certain
situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀
Window accessories
Do not install any accessories in the range
of movement of the windows; otherwise, the
pinch protection system will be impaired.◀
Opening Closing without the pinch protection

system
▷ Press the switch to the resistance For example, if there is an external danger or if
point. ice on the windows prevents a window from
The window opens while the switch is held. closing normally, proceed as follows:
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and

▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐ hold it there.
ance point.
Pinch protection is limited and the window
The window opens automatically. reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds
Mobility
Pressing again stops the motion. a certain value.

2. Pull the switch past the resistance point
Closing again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
Danger of pinching there.
The window closes without pinch protec‐
Reference
tion.
43
Safety switch Roller sunblinds for the rear side
Opening and closing
The following functions can be locked simulta‐ windows
neously, using the switch: Pull out the roller sunblind at the loop and hook
▷ Opening and closing of the rear windows it onto the bracket.
using the switches in the rear. Do not open the window while the roller
sunblind is raised.
Switching on and off
Do not open the window while the roller sunblind
Press the button. is raised; otherwise, there is a risk of damage at
The LED lights up if the safety function high speeds that may result in personal injury.◀
is switched on.
Safety switch for rear operation
Glass sunroof, powered*
Press the safety switch when transporting
children in the rear; otherwise, injury may result General information
if the windows are closed without supervision.◀
The glass sunroof and the sliding visor can be
To deactivate the function, the vehicle must be operated together or separately, using the same
in at least the radio ready state. switch.
The glass sunroof is operational when the igni‐
tion is switched on.
Roller sunblinds*
Danger of pinching
General information Monitor the closing process and make
If you are no longer able to move the roller sun‐ sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is
blind for the rear window after having activated clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
it a number of times in a row, the system is Take the remote control with you
blocked for a limited time to prevent overheat‐
Take the remote control with you when
ing. Let the system cool.
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
The roller sunblind for the rear window cannot cannot operate the roof and injure them‐
be moved at low interior temperatures. selves.◀
Driver's door controls
Raising the glass sunroof

Press the switch briefly.
Roller blind for rear window
▷ The closed roof is raised and
Press the button.
the sliding visor opens
slightly.
44
▷ The opened roof closes until Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐
At a glance
it is in its raised position. The tection
sliding visor stays completely
Despite the pinch protection system, check that
open.
the roof's closing path is clear; otherwise, the
Pressing the switch again closing action may not be interrupted in certain
closes the sliding visor al‐ extreme situations, such as when thin objects
most completely. are present.◀
Sliding visor with raised roof
Controls
Do not use force to close the sliding visor, Closing without the pinch protection
as this may damage the mechanism.◀ system
For example, if there is an external danger, pro‐
Opening/closing the sliding visor ceed as follows:
▷ Press the switch in the de‐ 1. Press the switch forward beyond the resist‐
Driving tips
sired direction to the resist‐ ance point and hold.
ance point and hold it there.
Pinch protection is limited and the roof re‐
The sliding visor moves while opens slightly if the closing force exceeds a
the switch is being held. certain value.
▷ Press the switch in the desired direction 2. Press the switch forward again beyond the
past the resistance point. resistance point and hold until the roof
Navigation
The sliding visor moves automatically. closes without pinch protection.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Initializing after a power failure
Opening/closing the glass sunroof After a power failure, it may only be possible to
When the sliding visor is open, proceed as de‐ operate the roof to a limited extent.
scribed under Sliding visor. Have the system initialized by your service cen‐
ter.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
sliding visor together
Press the switch twice in the de‐
sired direction past the resist‐
ance point.
The glass sunroof and sliding vi‐
sor move together. Pressing the
switch again stops the motion.
Convenience operation, refer to page 36, via the

remote control or the door lock.
Pinch protection system

Mobility
If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐

roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐
ment is stopped, beginning at approximately the
middle of the opening in the roof, or from the
raised position during closing.
The glass sunroof opens again slightly.
Reference
45
Adjusting
Adjusting
Sitting safely 4 Lumbar support*

The ideal seating position can make a vital con‐ 5 Height
tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. 6 Backrest
The seating position plays an important role in
an accident in combination with: Adjustments in detail: partially
powered seats
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 49.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 50.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 86.
Seats
Adjusting
Do not adjust the seat while driving
Never attempt to adjust the driver's seat Forward/back:
while driving. Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired
The seat could respond with unexpected move‐ direction.
ment and the ensuing loss of vehicle control After releasing the lever, move the seat forward
could lead to an accident.◀ or back slightly to make sure it engages prop‐
Do not incline the backrest too far to the erly.
rear
Do not incline the backrest on the front passen‐
ger side too far to the rear during driving. Oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of sliding under the
safety belt in an accident. This would eliminate
the protection normally provided by the belt.◀
At a glance: partially powered seats
Seat tilt:
Pull the lever and move the seat to the desired
tilt. After releasing the lever, apply your weight
to the seat or lift it off to make sure the seat en‐
gages properly.
1 Thigh support*
2 Tilt
3 Forward/backward
46
Adjustments in detail: power* seats
At a glance
1. Forward/back.
Controls
Height:
Move the button in the required direction.
2. Height.
Driving tips
Navigation
Backrest tilt:
Move the button in the required direction.
3. Seat tilt.
At a glance: power* seats
4. Backrest tilt.
1 Lumbar support*
2 Backrest width*
3 Shoulder support*
4 Backrest
5 Forward/back, height, tilt
Mobility
6 Thigh support*
Reference
47
Shoulder support*
Adjusting 5. Thigh support*.
Also supports the back in the shoulder area:

Lumbar support*
▷ Results in a relaxed seating position.
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
▷ Reduces strain on the shoulder muscles.
justed in such a way that it supports the lumbar
region of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
Active seat*
Active adjustment of the seat cushion's con‐
tours reduces muscular tension and fatigue to
help prevent lower back pain.
▷ Press the front/rear section of the switch.

The curvature is increased/decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower section of the switch. Press the button. The LED lights up.
The curvature is shifted up/down.
Backrest width* Front seat heating*
Change the width of the backrest using the side

wings to adjust the lateral support. Switching on
Press the button once for each temper‐
To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle,
ature level.
the backrest width temporarily opens fully.
48
The maximum temperature is reached when The LEDs go out.
At a glance
three LEDs are lit.
Active seat ventilation*, front
Switching off The seat surface is cooled by means of the in‐
Press the button longer. tegrated fan.
The LEDs go out. The ventilation rapidly cools the seat, e.g., if the
vehicle interior is overheated or for continuous
Temperature distribution* cooling at high temperatures.
Controls
The heating action in the seat cushion and back‐
rest can be distributed in different ways.
1. "Climate"
2. "Seat heating distribution"
Driving tips
3. Select the required seat.
Switching on
Press the button once for each ventila‐
Navigation
tion level.
The highest level is active when three LEDs are
lit.
4. Turn the controller to set the temperature After a short time, the system automatically
distribution. moves down one level in order to prevent ex‐
cessive cooling.
Rear seat heating*
Switching off
Press the button longer.
The LEDs go out.
Safety belts
General information
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving away.
Switching on
Although airbags enhance safety by providing
Press the button once for each temper‐
Mobility
added protection, they are not a substitute for

ature level.
safety belts.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit. Seats with safety belt
The vehicle has five seats, each of which is
Switching off equipped with a safety belt.
Reference
Press the button longer.
49
Unbuckling the belt
Adjusting ▷ The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be
correct for adult seat occupants of every 1. Hold the belt firmly.
build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
▷ The two rear safety belt buckles, integrated
3. Guide the belt back into its reel.
into the rear seat, are for passengers sitting
on the left and right.
Safety belt reminder for driver's and
▷ The belt buckle embossed with the word front passenger seat
CENTER is intended exclusively for use by
The indicator lamp flashes or lights up
passengers riding in the center position.
and a signal sounds. Make sure that the
One person per safety belt safety belts are positioned correctly.
Never allow more than one person to wear The safety belt reminder is active at speeds
a single safety belt. Never allow infants or small above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be ac‐
children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀ tivated if objects are placed on the front pas‐
Putting on the belt senger seat.
Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly
Damage to safety belts
across the lap and shoulders, as close to the
body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies low In the case of strain caused by accidents or
around the hips in the lap area and does not damage:
press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt can Have the safety belts, including the safety belt
slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal im‐ tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors
pact and injure the abdomen. checked.
The safety belt must not lie across the neck, rub Checking and replacing safety belts
on sharp edges, be routed over solid or breaka‐
Have the work performed only by your
ble objects, or be pinched.◀
service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured
Reduction of restraining effect that this safety feature will function properly.◀
Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the
belt from fitting properly, and pull the shoulder
belt periodically to readjust the tension across Front head restraints
your lap; otherwise, the retention effect of the
safety belt may be reduced.◀ Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
Buckling the belt risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of
an accident.
Adjusting the head restraint
Correctly adjust the head restraints of all
occupied seats; otherwise, there is an increased
risk of injury in an accident.◀
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is ap‐
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the proximately at ear level.
belt buckle.
50
Distance Adjusting the height: power* head
At a glance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is restraints
as close as possible to the back of the head.
Active head restraint

In the event of a rear-end collision with a certain
severity, the active head restraint automatically
reduces the distance from the head.
Controls
Reduced protective function
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint cov‐
ers.
Adjusting electrically.
▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
Driving tips
on the head restraints.
Distance to the back of the head:
▷ Do not attach accessories to the seat or manual head restraints
head restraint.
Otherwise, the protective function of the active
head restraint will be impaired and the personal
safety of the occupants will be endangered.◀
Navigation
Adjusting the height: manual head
restraints
▷ Forward: pull.
▷ Back: press the button and push the head
restraint toward the rear.
Distance to the back of the head:

power* head restraints
The head restraint is automatically repositioned
▷ To raise: pull.
when the shoulder support is adjusted, refer to
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and page 48.
push the head restraint down.
Mobility
Reference
51
Adjusting the side extensions* Adjusting the height
Adjusting
Fold forward for increased lateral support in the ▷ To raise: pull.

resting position. ▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
Removing
The head restraints cannot be removed. Folding forward
Rear head restraints

Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of
an accident.
Adjusting the head restraint
Press the button, arrow 1, and fold the head re‐
Correctly adjust the head restraints of all straint forward.
occupied seats; otherwise, there is an increased
risk of injury in an accident.◀
Removing
Height Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is ap‐
proximately at ear level.
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is
as close as possible to the back of the head.
1. Pull the head restraint upward as far as pos‐

sible.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head
restraint out completely.
Before transporting passengers
52
Reinstall the head restraint before transporting Comfort function
At a glance
anyone in the seat; otherwise, the protective 1. Open the driver's door.
function of the head restraint is unavailable.◀
2. Switch off the ignition.
3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2.
Seat, mirror, and steering The corresponding seat position is performed
wheel memory* automatically.
The procedure stops when a switch for adjust‐
Controls
General information ing the seat or one of the buttons is pressed.
Front Safety mode

1. Close the driver's door or switch on the ig‐
nition.
Driving tips
2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2 until
the adjustment procedure is completed.
Calling up of a seat position

deactivated
After a brief period, the calling up of stored seat
positions is deactivated to save battery power.
Navigation
Two different driver's seat, exterior mirror, and To reactivate calling up of a seat position:
steering wheel positions can be stored and re‐
▷ Open or close the door or trunk lid.
trieved for each remote control. The adjustment
of the lumbar support is not stored. ▷ Press a button on the remote control.
▷ Press the Start/Stop button.
Storing
1. Switch on the ignition. Calling up with the remote control
2. Set the desired position. The driver's seat, exterior mirror, and steering
wheel position selected last is stored for the
3. Press the button on the door. The currently used remote control.
LED in the button lights up. Pinch hazard when moving back the seat
4. Press the desired button 1 or 2. The LED If this function is used, first make sure that
goes out. the footwell behind the driver's seat is empty.
If the M button is pressed accidentally: Otherwise, people can be injured or objects
damaged when the seat is moved back.◀
Press the button on the door again.
The adjustment procedure is interrupted:
The LED goes out.
▷ When a seat position switch is pressed.
Calling up settings ▷ When a memory button is touched.

Mobility
Do not retrieve the memory while driving 1. "Settings"

Do not retrieve the memory setting while 2. "Door locks"
driving, as an unexpected movement of the seat
or steering wheel could result in an accident.◀
Reference
53
Adjusting electrically
Adjusting 3. "Last seat position auto."
The setting corresponds to the direction
in which the button is pressed.
Saving positions*
Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer
to page 53.
Adjusting manually
If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example,
press the edges of the mirror glass.
Mirrors
Automatic Curb Monitor*
Exterior mirrors When the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror
glass tilts downward slightly on the front pas‐
General information senger side. This improves your view of the curb
The mirror on the passenger side is more curved and other low-lying obstacles when parking, for
than the driver's mirror. example.
Estimating distances correctly Activating

Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. Do not estimate the distance 1. Slide the mirror changeover switch
to the traffic behind you based on what you see to the driver's mirror position.
in the mirror, as this will increase your risk of an 2. Engage transmission position R.
accident.◀
Deactivating
At a glance
Slide the mirror changeover switch to the pas‐
senger's mirror position.
Fold in and out

Press the button.
Possible up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h.

For example, this is advantageous
▷ In car washes.
1 Adjusting ▷ In narrow streets.
2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor* ▷ For folding back mirrors that were folded
3 Fold in and out* away manually.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
Selecting a mirror matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
To change over to the other mirror: Fold in the mirror in a car wash
Slide the mirror changeover switch.
54
Before entering an automatic car wash, fold in Steering wheel
At a glance
the exterior mirrors by hand or with the button;
otherwise, they could be damaged, depending General information
on the width of the vehicle.◀
Adjusting while driving
Automatic heating Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
could result in an accident.◀
whenever the engine is running.
Controls
Manual steering wheel adjustment
Interior rearview mirror
Reducing the blinding effect
Driving tips
1. Fold the lever down.
Navigation
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
From behind when driving at night: turn the height and angle to suit your seating posi‐
knob. tion.
3. Fold the lever back.
Interior rearview mirror, automatic
dimming feature* Power* steering wheel adjustment
Photocells are used for control: The steering wheel can be adjusted in four di‐
rections.
▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
Storing the position
For proper operation:
Mobility
Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer

▷ Keep the photocells clean. to page 53.
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.
Reference
55
Steering wheel heating*
Adjusting
Switching on/off
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.

▷ Off: the LED goes out.
56
Transporting children safely
At a glance
The right place for children Installing child restraint fixing
systems
Note
Children in the vehicle Before mounting
Controls
Do not leave children unattended in the Before mounting a child restraint fixing system
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐ on the rear middle seat, return both outer backr‐
selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the ests to the basic position.
doors.◀
Notes
Children should always be in the rear Manufacturer's information for child re‐
Driving tips
Accident research shows that the safest place straint fixing systems
for children is in the back seat. To select, mount and use child restraint fixing
Transporting children in the rear systems, observe the information provided by
the system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro‐
Only transport children younger than
tective effect can be impaired.◀
13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in the
rear in child restraint fixing systems provided in
Navigation
In the front passenger seat
accordance with the age, weight and size of the
child; otherwise, there is an increased risk of in‐ After installing a child restraint fixing system in
jury in an accident. the front passenger seat, make sure that the
front, knee and side airbags on the front pas‐
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
senger side are deactivated.
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
fixing system can no longer be used, due to their Deactivating the front passenger airbags
age, weight and size.◀ If a child restraint fixing system is used in
the front passenger seat, the front passenger
Children on the front passenger seat airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is
Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐ an increased risk of injury to the child when the
straint fixing system in the front passenger seat, airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint
make sure that the front, knee and side airbags fixing system.◀
on the front passenger side are deactivated. Au‐
tomatic deactivation of front passenger airbags, Seat position and height
refer to page 87. Before installing a child restraint fixing system,
Deactivating the front passenger airbags move the front passenger seat as far back as
possible and adjust its height to the middle po‐
If a child restraint fixing system is used in
sition to obtain the best possible position for the
the front passenger seat, the front passenger
belt and to offer optimal protection in the event
airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is
of an accident.
Mobility
an increased risk of injury to the child when the

airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint Do not change the seat position and height after
fixing system.◀ this.
Backrest width*
Before installing a child restraint fixing system in
Reference
the front passenger seat, open the backrest
57
Note
Transporting children safely width, refer to page 48, completely. Do not
change the backrest width again and do not call Manufacturer's information for LATCH
up a memory position. child restraint fixing systems
Backrest width for the child seat To mount and use the LATCH child restraint fix‐
Before installing a child restraint fixing ing systems, observe the operating and safety
system in the front passenger seat, the backrest information from the system manufacturer; oth‐
width must be opened completely. Do not erwise, the level of protection may be re‐
change the adjustment after this; otherwise, the duced.◀
stability of the child seat will be reduced.◀
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
Child seat security Correctly engage the lower LATCH an‐
chors
Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have
properly engaged and that the child restraint fix‐
ing system is resting snugly against the back‐
rest; otherwise, the degree of protection offered
may be reduced.◀
The rear safety belts and the front passenger

safety belt can be locked against pulling out for
mounting the child restraint fixing systems.
Locking the safety belt

1. Pull out the belt webbing completely.
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo‐
2. Secure the child restraint fixing system with
cated in the gap between the seat and backrest.
the belt.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and Before mounting the LATCH child restraint fix‐
pull it taut against the child restraint fixing ing system, pull the belt away from the child re‐
system. The safety belt is locked. straint fixing system.
Unlocking the safety belt Mounting LATCH child restraint fixing

systems
1. Unbuckle the belt buckle.
1. Mount the child restraint fixing system; refer
2. Remove the child restraint fixing system.
to the operating instructions of the system.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com‐
2. Make sure that both lower LATCH anchors
pletely.
have properly engaged and that the child re‐
straint fixing system is resting snugly
against the backrest.
LATCH child restraint fixing
system
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for CHil‐
dren.
58
Child restraint fixing systems with a 6 Seat backrest
At a glance
tether strap
7 Upper retaining strap
Mounting points
Attaching the upper retaining strap to
the mounting point
1. Remove the mounting point cover.
2. Raise the head restraint. Do not change the
Controls
middle head restraint*.
3. Guide the upper retaining strap between the
supports of the head restraint.
Guide it over the head restraint of the middle
seat.
Driving tips
Depending on the vehicle equipment, there are 4. Attach the hooks of the retaining strap to the
two outer or three mounting points for child re‐ mounting eyes.
straint fixing systems with a tether strap. 5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
LATCH mounting eyes down.
Only use the mounting eyes for the upper 6. Lower the head restraint.
LATCH retaining strap to secure child restraint
Navigation
fixing systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes
could be damaged.◀ Locking the doors and
windows
Retaining strap guide
Retaining strap Rear doors
Make sure the upper retaining strap does
not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as it
passes to the top anchor. Otherwise, the strap
will not properly secure the child restraint fixing
system in the event of an accident.◀
Push the locking lever on the rear doors down.

The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Safety switch for the rear

1 Direction of travel
Mobility
Press the button on the driver's door if

2 Head restraint. children are being transported in the
3 Hook for upper retaining strap rear.
4 Mounting point/eye This locks various functions so that they cannot
5 Rear window shelf be operated from the rear: safety switch, refer to
page 44.
Reference
59
Driving
Driving
Start/Stop button Transmission position P with the ignition

off
The concept When the ignition is switched off, position P is
Pressing the Start/Stop button engaged automatically. When in an automatic
switches the ignition on or off and car wash, for example, ensure that the ignition is
starts the engine. not switched off accidentally.◀
The engine starts if the brake When the vehicle is locked using the central
pedal is pressed when you press locking system, the ignition switches off auto‐
the Start/Stop button. matically.
Ignition on Radio ready state

Press the Start/Stop button and do not press on This state can only be reached by pressing the
the brake pedal at the same time. Start/Stop button briefly to switch off the engine
while it is running.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
Some electronic systems/power consumers re‐
Most of the indicator and warning lamps in the
main ready for operation.
instrument cluster light up for varying lengths of
time. Radio ready state switches off automatically:
To save battery power when the engine is off, ▷ After approx. 8 minutes.
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary ▷ When the vehicle is locked using the central
electronic systems/power consumers. locking system.
The ignition switches off automatically:
▷ During locking when the low beams are
switched on. Starting the engine
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
General information
completely, so that the engine can still be
started. Enclosed areas
▷ When the engine is switched off and the ig‐ Do not let the engine run in enclosed
nition is switched on, the system automati‐ areas; otherwise, breathing of exhaust fumes
cally switches to radio ready state when the may lead to loss of consciousness and death.
door is opened, if the light is switched off or The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an
the daytime running lights are switched on. odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.◀
Unattended vehicle
Ignition off Do not leave the car unattended with the
Press the Start/Stop button again and do not engine running; otherwise, it presents a poten‐
press on the brake pedal at the same time. tial source of danger.
All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go Before leaving the car with the engine running,
out. set the parking brake and place the transmission
To save battery power when the engine is off, in position P or neutral to prevent the car from
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary moving.◀
electronic systems/power consumers. Frequent starting in quick succession
60
Avoid repeated futile attempts at starting the car Manual transmission
At a glance
and avoid starting the car frequently in quick
succession. Otherwise, the fuel is not burned or Switching off the engine
is inadequately burned, and there is the danger 1. With the car at a standstill, press the Start/
of overheating and damaging the catalytic con‐ Stop button.
verter.◀
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the
3. Set the parking brake.
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at mod‐
Controls
erate engine speeds.
Automatic transmission/Sports
automatic transmission*
Manual transmission
Switching off the engine
Starting the engine
1. Engage transmission position P with the ve‐
1. Press on the brake pedal.
Driving tips
hicle stopped.
2. Press on the clutch and shift to neutral.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
Automatic transmission/Sports The radio ready state is switched on.
automatic transmission* 3. Set the parking brake.
Navigation
Starting the engine Before driving into a car wash
Press on the brake pedal and The vehicle is able to roll when the following
press the Start/Stop button. steps are adhered to:
The ignition is activated automat‐ 1. Depress the brake pedal.
ically for a brief period and is
stopped as soon as the engine 2. Engage transmission position N.
starts. 3. Release the parking brake or deactivate Au‐
tomatic Hold, refer to page 62.
4. Switch the engine off.
Engine stop Transmission position P with the ignition
off
General information When the ignition is switched off, position P is
Take the remote control with you engaged automatically. When in an automatic
Take the remote control with you when car wash, for example, ensure that the ignition is
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example, not switched off accidentally.◀
cannot operate the windows and injure them‐ Transmission position P is engaged automati‐
selves.◀ cally:
Set the parking brake and further secure ▷ When the ignition is switched off.
the vehicle as required ▷ After approx. 15 minutes if the vehicle is not
Mobility
Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐ moved.

erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward
and downward inclines, further secure the vehi‐
cle, for example, by turning the steering wheel in
the direction of the curb. ◀
Reference
61
Parking brake
Driving Automatic transmission: Press the switch while
the brake pedal is pressed or transmission po‐
The concept sition P is engaged.
The parking brake is primarily intended to pre‐ The LED and indicator lamp go out.
vent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it The parking brake is released.
brakes the rear wheels.
Take the remote control with you
In cars with automatic transmission:
The parking brake can be set manually or auto‐
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
matically:
cannot release the parking brake.◀
▷ Manual: by pulling and pushing the switch.
▷ Automatic: by activating Automatic Hold, re‐ Automatic Hold*
fer to page 62.
The concept
This system assists the driver by automatically
setting and releasing the parking brake, such as
when moving in stop-and-go traffic.
The vehicle is automatically held in place when
it is stationary.
On inclines, the system prevents the vehicle
from rolling backward when driving away.
Setting
Pull the switch.
The LED lights up.
The indicator lamp lights up in red. The

parking brake is set.
Indicator lamp in Canadian models
For your safety

While driving
Automatic Hold is deactivated automatically and
Use while driving: the parking brake is set when:
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes ▷ The engine is switched off.
hard while the button is being pulled.
▷ A door is opened and the driver's safety belt
The indicator lamp lights up in red, a sig‐ is unbuckled.
nal sounds and the brake lamps light up. ▷ The vehicle is braked to a standstill with the
Indicator lamp in Canadian models parking brake while driving.
If the vehicle is braked to a speed of approx. The indicator lamp switches from green
2 mph/3 km/h, the parking brake remains set. to red and the letters AUTO H go out.
Indicator lamp in Canadian models
Releasing
Before driving away:
Manual transmission: Press the switch
▷ Release the parking brake manually.
while the brake or clutch is pressed.
62
▷ Reactivate Automatic Hold. Parking
At a glance
Leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐ The parking brake is automatically set if the en‐
ning gine is switched off while the vehicle is being
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐ held by Automatic Hold.
ning, engage position P of the automatic trans‐ The indicator lamp changes from green
mission and ensure that the parking brake is set. to red.
Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.◀
The parking brake is not set if the engine
Controls
is switched off while the vehicle is coast‐
Activating
ing to a halt. Automatic Hold is deacti‐
Press the button. vated.
The LED and the letters AUTO H light The parking brake can also be released
up. after the engine is switched off, e.g., in a
car wash.
Driving tips
The indicator lamp lights up.
Automatic Hold is activated. Take the remote control with you
Deactivating leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
Press the button again. cannot release the parking brake.◀
The LED and the letters AUTO H go
out. Malfunction
Navigation
In the event of a failure or malfunction of the
Automatic Hold is deactivated.
parking brake, secure the vehicle against rolling
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold, using a wheel chock, for example, when leaving
press on the brake pedal to deactivate it. it.
When the parking brake, refer to page 62, is set
manually, Automatic Hold is deactivated auto‐
matically. Turn signal, high beams,
headlamp flasher
Driving
Automatic Hold is activated: the vehicle is auto‐ Turn signal
matically secured against rolling when it stops.
The indicator lamp lights up in green.

Press on the accelerator to drive away.
The brake is released automatically.
The indicator lamp goes out.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian
models
Before driving into a car wash
Mobility
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.

Deactivate Automatic Hold; otherwise, the
parking brake will be set when the vehicle is sta‐ To switch off manually, press the lever to the re‐
tionary and the vehicle will no longer be able to sistance point.
roll.◀ Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp in‐
dicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
Reference
63
Triple turn signal activation
Driving blades and the windshield wiper motor may be
Press the lever to the resistance point. damaged.◀
The turn signal flashes three times.

Switching on
The function can be activated or deactivated:
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"
Press the wiper levers up.

The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Normal wiping speed: press up once.
The wipers switch to intermittent operation
Signaling briefly when the vehicle is stationary.
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold ▷ Fast wiping speed: press up twice or press
it there for as long as you want the turn signal to once beyond the resistance point.
flash.
The wipers switch to normal speed when the
vehicle is stationary.
High beams, headlamp flasher
Switching off and brief wipe
▷ High beams, arrow 1.

▷ Headlamp flasher, arrow 2. Press the wiper levers down.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
Washer/wiper system ▷ Brief wipe: press down once.
Switching the wipers on/off and brief ▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down once.
wipe ▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.
Do not switch on the wipers if frozen
Do not switch on the wipers if they are fro‐ Rain sensor
zen onto the windshield; otherwise, the wiper The time between wipes is controlled automat‐
ically and depends on the intensity of the rainfall.
64
The sensor is located on the windshield, directly Washing the windshield, headlamps
At a glance
in front of the interior rearview mirror.
Activating/deactivating the rain sensor
Controls
Pull the lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
Driving tips
Press the button on the wiper lever.
In addition, the headlamps are cleaned at regular
When activated, the wipers move over the wind‐
intervals when the vehicle lights are switched
shield once.
on.
The LED in the steering column stalk lights up.
Do not use the washer system at freezing
Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes temperatures
Deactivate the rain sensor when passing
Navigation
Do not use the washers if there is any danger
through an automatic car wash; otherwise, dam‐ that the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth‐
age could be caused by undesired wiper activa‐ erwise, your vision could be obscured. For this
tion.◀ reason, use antifreeze.
Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is
Rain sensor sensitivity
empty; otherwise, you could damage the
pump.◀
Windshield washer nozzles

The washer jets are automatically heated*
whenever the ignition is switched on.
Fold-out position of the wipers

Required when changing the wiper blades or
under frosty conditions, for example.
Turn the thumb wheel.
2. Under frosty conditions, ensure that the
wiper blades are not frozen onto the wind‐
shield.
Mobility
3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point of

resistance and hold it for approx. 3 seconds,
until the wiper remains in a nearly vertical
position.
After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper
system, refer to page 64, must be reactivated.
Reference
65
Driving Fold the wipers back down Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain
the correct mixing ratio.
Before switching the ignition on, fold the
wipers back down to the windshield; otherwise,
Capacity
the wipers may become damaged when they are
switched on.◀ approx. 5.3 US quarts/ 5 liters
1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Press the wiper levers down. The wipers Manual transmission
move to their resting position and are ready
for operation. Shifting
Shifting into 5th or 6th gear
Washer fluid When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, Push

the gearshift lever to the right; otherwise inad‐
General information vertent shifting into the 3rd or 4th gear could
lead to engine damage.◀
Antifreeze for washer fluid
Antifreeze is flammable. Therefore, keep Reverse gear
it away from sources of ignition.
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. When
Only keep it in the closed original container and the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a slight
inaccessible to children. resistance needs to be overcome.
Follow the instructions on the container.◀
Container for washer fluid Automatic transmission with

Adding washer fluid Steptronic*
Only add washer fluid when the engine is
cool, and then close the cover completely to Transmission positions
avoid contact between the washer fluid and hot
engine parts. D Drive, automatic position
Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a risk Position for normal vehicle operation. All for‐
to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀ ward gears are available.
R is Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
N is Neutral
Use in automatic car washes, for example. The
vehicle can roll.
When the ignition is switched off, refer to
page 60, position P is engaged automatically.
All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐
voir. P Park
Fill with water and – if required – with a washer Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The
antifreeze, according to the manufacturer's rec‐ drive wheels are blocked.
ommendations. P is engaged automatically:
66
▷ After the engine is switched off, if the car is
At a glance
in radio ready state, refer to page 60, or if the
ignition is switched off, refer to page 60, and
if position R or D is engaged.
▷ If the ignition is switched off and position N
is engaged.
▷ If the vehicle is standing with position R or D
engaged and you unfasten the belt of the
Controls
driver's seat and open the driver's door.
Press the Unlock button to:
Kickdown ▷ Engage R.
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving ▷ Shift out of P.
performance. Press on the accelerator beyond
Driving tips
the resistance point at the full throttle position. Engaging P
Engaging the transmission position

▷ Transmission position P can only be disen‐
gaged if the engine is running and the brake
pedal is pressed.
▷ With the vehicle stationary, press on the
Navigation
brake pedal before shifting out of P or N;
otherwise, the shift command will not be
executed: shift lock.
Depress the brake until you start driv‐ Press button P.
ing
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after Sport program and manual mode M/S
you select a driving position, maintain pres‐
sure on the brake pedal until you are ready Activating the sport program
to start.◀
Engaging D, R and N
Push the selector lever to the left out of trans‐

mission position D.
Mobility
DS is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐ This position is recommended for a perform‐
rection, beyond a resistance point if necessary. ance-oriented driving style.
After releasing the selector lever, it returns to its
center position.
Reference
67
Activating the M/S manual mode
Driving ▷ Shift up: pull right shift paddle.
Push the selector lever to the left out of trans‐ ▷ Shift down: pull left shift paddle.
mission position D. The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropriate
Push the selector lever forward or backward. engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not shift
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is down if the engine speed is too high.
changed. The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
cluster, e.g., M1.
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐ Displays in the instrument cluster
ward. The transmission position is dis‐
▷ To shift up: press the selector lever back‐ played, e.g., P.
ward.
The transmission only shifts up or down if the
rpm and vehicle speed are appropriate. If the
engine speed is too high, the transmission does Manually releasing and engaging the
not shift down. transmission lock*
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐ In the event of a power failure, manually release
strument panel, followed by the current gear. the transmission lock; otherwise, the drive
wheels will be locked and it will not be possible
Ending the sport program/manual to tow the vehicle.
mode Depress the brake when releasing the
Push the selector lever to the right. transmission lock
D is displayed in the instrument cluster. When manually releasing the transmission lock,
depress the brake; otherwise, the vehicle could
Sports automatic transmission* roll.◀
Only release the transmission lock in the event
of a malfunction, e.g., for towing.
After parking the vehicle, engage the transmis‐
sion lock again.
Unlocking
1. Open the cover.
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow

you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
hands on the steering wheel.
If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are
used to shift gears in automatic mode, the trans‐
mission temporarily switches to manual mode.
If the shift paddles are not used and the vehicle
is not accelerated for a certain time, the system
switches back into automatic mode if the selec‐
tor lever is in D.
68
2. Take out the cupholder insert and set aside. 6. Remove the cap.
At a glance
Be careful with the cables!
Controls
7. Insert the release tool into the opening.
3. Remove the release tool from the tool kit.
Driving tips
Navigation
8. Turn the release tool all the way and then
4. Insert the release tool into the opening. press down. The transmission lock is re‐
leased and position P is no longer engaged.
5. Turn the release tool and pull it out with the
cap. Locking the transmission lock again
After parking the vehicle, lock the trans‐
mission lock again to prevent the vehicle from
rolling.◀
Locking
Mobility
1. Pull out the release tool. The transmission

lock is locked again.
2. Place the cap on the release tool.
3. Insert the release tool with the cap into the
opening and turn it all the way counterclock‐
wise.
Reference
69
Driving 4. Remove the release tool.
5. Fit the cupholder insert.
70
Displays
At a glance
Instrument cluster
At a glance
Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
1 Fuel gauge 6 Electronic displays
2 Speedometer 7 External temperature, clock
3 Indicator/warning lamps 8 Miles, trip miles
4 Tachometer 9 Reset miles
5 Oil temperature
Odometer and trip odometer External temperature

▷ Odometer, arrow 1.
External temperature warning
▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2.
If the display drops to +37 ℉/
+3 ℃, a signal sounds.
A message is displayed in the in‐
Press the knob. strument cluster.
Mobility
▷ When the ignition is switched There is the increased danger of

off, the time, external temper‐ ice.
ature and odometer are dis‐
Ice on roads
played.
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃,
▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip
Reference
there can be a risk of ice on roads.

odometer is reset.
71
Engine oil temperature
Displays Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and shady
roads, for example, to avoid the increased dan‐
ger of an accident.◀
Time
The time is displayed at the bot‐
tom of the instrument cluster.
Setting the time and time format,
refer to page 76.
Date ▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at the low tem‐

The date is displayed in the in‐ perature end. Drive at moderate engine and
strument cluster. vehicle speeds.
Setting the date and date format, ▷ Normal operating temperature: the pointer
refer to page 76. is in the middle or in the right half of the tem‐
perature display.
Tachometer ▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high tem‐
perature end. Switch off the engine imme‐
diately and allow it to cool down.
Check the oil level, refer to page 233.
Current fuel consumption

Displays the current fuel con‐
sumption. You can check
whether you are currently driving
in an efficient and environmen‐
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning tally-friendly manner.
field. In this range, the fuel supply is interrupted
to protect the engine. Displaying the current fuel
consumption
Coolant temperature 1. "Settings"
Should the coolant, and with it the engine, be‐ 2. "Info display"
come too hot, a warning message is displayed.
3. "Additional indicators"
Check the coolant level, refer to page 234.
The bar display for the current fuel consumption

is displayed in the instrument cluster.
72
Energy regeneration 3. "Additional indicators"
At a glance
The energy of motion of the ve‐
hicle is converted to electrical en‐
ergy while coasting, refer to
page 149. The vehicle battery is
partially charged and fuel con‐
sumption can be lowered.
Controls
Fuel gauge
The bar display for the cruising range is dis‐

played in the instrument cluster.
Driving tips
Selection lists in the
instrument cluster
The concept
Fuel capacity: approx. 18.5 US gal/70 liters
Navigation
The vehicle inclination may cause the display to
vary.
Notes on refueling, refer to page 222.
Range
After the reserve range is
reached:
▷ A message appears briefly. The following functions can be operated using
▷ The remaining range is the buttons and the thumb wheel on the steering
shown on the computer. wheel and the display in the instrument cluster:
The message appears continuously below a ▷ Current audio source.
range of approx. 30 miles/50 km. ▷ Redial on telephone*.
Refuel promptly ▷ Activation of the voice activation system*.
Refuel no later than at a range 30 miles/
50 km, or engine functions are not ensured and
damage may occur.◀
Displaying the cruising range

Mobility
1. "Settings"
2. "Info display"
Reference
73
Activating a list and creating the
Displays ▷ Time of arrival*
setting After entering the distance or when desti‐
nation guidance is activated in the naviga‐
tion system.
▷ Distance to destination*
After entering the distance or when desti‐
nation guidance is activated in the naviga‐
tion system.
▷ Arrow view of navigation system*
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
Press a button on the right side of the steering
wheel or turn the thumb wheel to activate the
Adjusting the info display
required list.
You can select what information from the com‐
Create the setting using the thumb wheel.
puter is to be displayed on the info display of the
instrument cluster.
Computer 1. "Settings"
2. "Info display"
Calling up information on the info 3. Select the desired displays.
display
Press the computer button on the turn signal Speed limit

lever. Display of a speed limit which, when reached,
Information is displayed on the info display of the should cause a warning to be issued.
instrument cluster. Renewed warning if the vehicle speed drops be‐
low the set speed limit once by at least 3 mph/
Information at a glance 5 km/h.
Repeatedly pressing the button
on the turn signal lever displays Displaying, setting or changing the
the information on the info dis‐ limit
play in the following order: 1. "Settings"
▷ Range. 2. "Speed"
▷ Average fuel consumption.
▷ Average speed.
▷ Date*.
74
3. "Warning at:" Resetting the trip computer
At a glance
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Trip computer"
Controls
4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is
displayed.
5. Press the controller. 3. "Reset": all values are reset.
Driving tips
The speed limit is stored. "Automatically reset": all values are reset
approx. 4 hours after the vehicle comes to a
Activating/deactivating the limit standstill.
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning"
Navigation
Applying your current speed as the

limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Select current speed" Display on the Control Display
4. Press the controller. Display the computer or trip computer on the
The current vehicle speed is stored as the Control Display.
limit. 1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Resetting values
The average fuel consumption and average Resetting the fuel consumption and
speed can be reset. speed
Press and hold the computer button on the turn 1. "Vehicle Info"
signal lever.
2. "Onboard info"
Trip computer
Mobility
There are two types of computer.

▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as
often as necessary.
▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an over‐
view of the current trip.
Reference
75
Displays 3. "Cons." or "Speed" 2. "Time/Date"
4. "Yes" 3. "Time:"
Gear shift indicator*

The concept
The system recommends the most fuel efficient
gear in the current driving situation.
Indicators to shift up or down are displayed in
the instrument cluster.
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours
Displays are displayed.
6. Turn the controller until the desired minutes
are displayed.
The time is stored.
Setting the time format

1. "Settings"
1 Fuel efficient gear is engaged 2. "Time/Date"
2 Shift up to fuel efficient gear 3. "Format:"
3 Shift down to fuel efficient gear 4. Select the desired format.
The time format is stored.
Settings on the Control Date

Display
Setting the date
Time 1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
Setting the time
3. "Date:"
1. "Settings"
4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed.
76
5. Press the controller. 3. "Language:"
At a glance
6. Make the necessary settings for the month
and year.
The date is stored.
Setting the date format

1. "Settings"
Controls
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format. 4. Select the desired language.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Driving tips
Setting the voice dialog
To switch between a standard dialog and a short
dialog.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
Navigation
The date format is stored. 3. "Speech mode:"
4. Select the desired dialog.
Language
Setting the language
To set the language on the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
Units of measure
Setting the units of measure

To set the units for fuel consumption, route/dis‐
tance and temperature:
1. "Settings"
Mobility
2. "Language/Units"
Reference
77
Service requirements
Displays 3. Select the desired menu item.
Display
4. Select the desired unit.

rently in use. The driving distance or the time to the next serv‐
ice is displayed briefly after the ignition is
Brightness switched on.
The current service requirements can be read
Setting the brightness out from the remote control by the service spe‐
To set the brightness of the Control Display: cialist.
1. "Settings" Data regarding the maintenance status or legally

mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto‐
2. "Control display"
matically transmitted to your service center be‐
3. "Brightness" fore a service due date, Automatic Service Re‐
quest, refer to page 215.
Detailed information on service

requirements
More information on the scope of service re‐
quired can be displayed on the Control Display.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
rently in use.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness control may not be clearly visible.
3. "Service required"
78
Required maintenance procedures and le‐ 4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
At a glance
gally mandated inspections are displayed. 5. "Date:"
6. Create the settings.
7. Confirm.
The entered date is stored.
Automatic Service Request
Controls
Data regarding the maintenance status or legally
mandated inspections of the vehicle are
automatically transmitted to your service center
before a service due date.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐
tion. You can check when your service center was
Driving tips
notified.
Symbols 1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
Symbols Description
3. Open "Options".
No service is currently required.
4. "Last Service Request"
Navigation
The deadline for service or a le‐
gally mandated inspection is Check Control
approaching. Please make a
service appointment. The concept
The Check Control system monitors functions
The service deadline has al‐ in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in
ready passed. the monitored systems.
A Check Control message is displayed as a
Entering appointment dates combination of indicator or warning lamps and
text messages in the instrument cluster and in
Enter the dates for the required inspections.
the Head-up Display*.
Ensure that the vehicle date and time are set
In addition, an acoustic signal may be output and
correctly.
a text message may appear on the Control Dis‐
1. "Vehicle Info" play.
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Mobility
Reference
79
Indicator/warning lamps
Displays malfunctions occur at once, the messages
are displayed consecutively.
These messages can be hidden for approx.
8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐
played again automatically.
▷ Other Check Control messages are hidden
automatically after approx. 20 seconds.
They are stored and can be displayed again
later.
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in Displaying stored Check Control
a variety of combinations and colors. messages
Several of the lamps are checked for proper 1. "Vehicle Info"
functioning and light up temporarily when the 2. "Vehicle status"
engine is started or the ignition is switched on. 3. "Check Control"
Text messages
Text messages in combination with a symbol in
the instrument cluster explain a Check Control
message and the meaning of the indicator and
warning lamps.
Supplementary text messages

Additional information on the Control Display,
e.g., on the cause of a malfunction or the re‐ 4. Select the text message.
quired action, can be called up via Check Con‐
trol. Messages after trip completion
The text of urgent messages is displayed auto‐ Malfunctions indicated during a trip are dis‐
matically. played again after the ignition is switched off.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the computer button on the turn signal

lever.
▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐

played continuously and are not cleared un‐
til the malfunction is eliminated. If several
80
Lamps
At a glance
At a glance Welcome lamps
When parking the vehicle, leave the switch in
position or : the parking and interior
lamps light up briefly when the vehicle is un‐
locked.
Controls
Activating/deactivating the welcome
lamps
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
Driving tips
1 Rear fog lamps* 3. "Welcome light"
2 Front fog lamps
3 Automatic headlamp control/adaptive light
control*/High-beam Assistant*/welcome
lamps
4 Lamps off/daytime running lights*
Navigation
5 Parking lamps
6 Low beams/welcome lamps
7 Instrument lighting
8 Headlamp range control* The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Parking lamps/low beams, Headlamp courtesy delay feature

headlamp control The low beams stay lit for a short while after the
ignition is switched off, if the lamps are switched
Parking lamps off and the headlamp flasher is switched on.
Switch position : the vehicle lamps light
up on all sides, e.g., for parking. Setting the duration
1. "Settings"
Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe‐
riods; otherwise, the battery may become dis‐ 2. "Lighting"
charged and it would then be impossible to start 3. "Pathway light.: s"
the engine.
When parking, it is preferable to switch on the
one-sided roadside parking lamps, refer to
Mobility
page 82.
Low beams
Switch position with the ignition switched
on: the low beams light up.
Reference
81
Lamps 4. Set the duration. The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use.
rently in use.
Roadside parking lamps
Automatic headlamp control
Switch position : the low beams are switched
on and off automatically, e.g., in tunnels, in twi‐
light or if there is precipitation. The indicator
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
The low beams always stay on when the fog
lamps are switched on.
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
Personal responsibility
The automatic headlamp control cannot Switching on
serve as a substitute for your personal judgment With the ignition switched off, press the lever
in determining when the lamps should be either up or down past the resistance point for
switched on in response to ambient lighting approx. 2 seconds.
conditions.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect Switching off
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in
should always switch on the lamps manually un‐ the opposite direction.
der these conditions.◀
Daytime running lights* Adaptive light control*

The daytime running lights light up in posi‐
tion 0, and . After the ignition is The concept
switched off, the parking lamps light up in posi‐ Adaptive light control is a variable headlamp
tion . control system that enables dynamic illumina‐
tion of the road surface.
Activating/deactivating
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
1. "Settings" rameters, the light from the headlamp follows
2. "Lighting" the course of the road.
3. "Daytime running lamps" In tight curves, such as on mountainous roads
or when turning, turning lamps that light up the
inside area of the curve are switched on at
speeds up to approx. 70 km/h, approx. 44 mph.
Controls
Activating
Switch position with the ignition switched
on.
82
The turning lamps are automatically switched lows. The driver can intervene at any time and
At a glance
on depending on the steering angle or the use switch the high beams on and off as usual.
of turn signals.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the adaptive Activating the high-beam assistant
light control directs light towards the front pas‐
senger side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
When driving in reverse, only the turning lamp is
active and illuminates the outside of the curve.
Controls
Self-leveling headlights
The self-leveling headlights feature adapts the
light distribution to the contours of the road.
The light distribution is lowered on hilltops to
Driving tips
avoid blinding oncoming traffic and raised in de‐ 1. Turn the light switch to or .
pressions to increase visibility. 2. Press the button on the turn signal lever, ar‐
row.
Malfunction The indicator lamp in the instrument
A message is displayed. cluster lights up.
Adaptive light control is malfunctioning or has When the lights are switched on, the
Navigation
failed. Have the system checked as soon as pos‐ high beams are switched on and off automati‐
sible. cally.
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to ad‐
Headlamp range control* equate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.
The headlamp range of the low beams can be
manually adjusted for the vehicle load to avoid Switching the high beams on and off
blinding oncoming traffic. manually
The values following the slash apply to trailer
operation.
0 / 1 = 1 to 2 people without luggage
0 / 1 = 5 people without luggage
0 / 1 = 5 people with luggage
2 / 2 = 1 person, full trunk
High-beam assistant* ▷ High beams on, arrow 1.

▷ High beams off/headlamp flasher, arrow 2.
The concept
To reactivate the high-beam assistant, press the
Mobility
When the lights are switched on, this system button on the turn signal lever.
automatically switches the high beams on and
off. The procedure is controlled by a sensor on System limits
the front of the interior rearview mirror. The as‐
sistant ensures that the high beams are
switched on whenever the traffic situation al‐ The high-beam assistant cannot serve as
Reference
a substitute for the driver's personal judgment
83
Lamps of when to use the high beams. Therefore, man‐ Press the button. The green indicator
ually switch off the high beams in situations lamp lights up.
where this is required to avoid a safety risk.◀
If the automatic headlamp control, refer to
The system is not fully functional in situations page 82, is activated, the low beams will come
such as the following, and driver intervention on automatically when you switch on the front
may be necessary: fog lamps.
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation. Cornering lamp*
▷ In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as In the switch position, a cornering lamp is
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and switched on for a broader light distribution at
wagons; when driving close to train or ship speeds up to 68 mph/110 km/h.
traffic; and at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming Instrument lighting
traffic on freeways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the pres‐ Adjusting
ence of highly reflective signs. The parking lamps or low beams
must be switched on to adjust the
▷ At low speeds.
brightness.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
Adjust the brightness using the
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
thumb wheel.
ered with stickers, etc.
Camera
Interior lamps
General information
The interior lamps, footwell lamps, entry lamps
and courtesy lamps are controlled automati‐
cally.
The brightness of some of these lamps is influ‐
enced by the thumb wheel for the instrument
lighting.
The camera is located on the front of the interior
rearview mirror.
Keep the area in front of the interior rearview
mirror clear.
Fog lamps
Front fog lamps*
1 Interior lamps
The parking lamps or low beams must be
switched on. 2 Reading lamp
84
Switching the interior lamps on and off
At a glance
Press the button.
To switch off permanently: press the button for

approx. 3 seconds.
To clear this setting: press the button.
Reading lamps
Controls
Press the button.
Reading lamps are located at the front and rear

next to the interior lamps.
Driving tips
Navigation
Mobility
Reference
85
Safety
Safety
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag

2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbags
3 Head airbags
Front airbags Protective action

Front airbags help protect the driver and front Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end
which safety belts alone cannot provide ade‐ collisions.
quate restraint.
Information on how to ensure the optimal
protective effect of the airbags
Side airbags
▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags.
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
body on the side in the chest area. ▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim, holding your hands at
Head airbags the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep
the danger of injury to your hands or arms as
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports the
low as possible if the airbag is triggered.
head.
▷ There should be no people, animals, or ob‐
Knee airbag jects between an airbag and a person.
The knee airbag protects the legs during a fron‐ ▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
tal collision. the front passenger side as a storage area.
86
▷ Keep the dashboard and window on the Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐
At a glance
front passenger side clear, i.e., do not cover tem could lead to failure in an emergency or un‐
with adhesive labels or coverings, and do not desired triggering of the airbag, either of which
attach holders such as for navigation instru‐ could result in injury.◀
ments and mobile phones. Warnings and information on the airbags are
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting also found on the sun visors.
correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs
in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries can Automatic deactivation of the front
Controls
occur if the front airbag is triggered. passenger airbags
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or The system determines whether the front pas‐
other objects on the front passenger seat senger seat is occupied by measuring the re‐
that are not approved specifically for seats sistance of the human body.
with integrated side airbags. The front, knee, and side airbag on the front
Driving tips
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jack‐ passenger side are activated or deactivated ac‐
ets, over the backrests. cordingly.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads Leave feet in the footwell
away from the side airbag and do not rest
Make sure that the front passenger keeps
against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries
his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, the front
can occur if the airbags are triggered.
passenger airbags may not function properly.◀
▷ Do not remove the airbag restraint system.
Navigation
Child restraint fixing system in the front
▷ Do not remove the steering wheel. passenger seat
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐ Before transporting a child on the front passen‐
bag cover panels, cover them or modify ger seat, see the safety notes and instructions
them in any way. under Children on the front passenger seat.◀
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This Malfunction of the automatic
also applies to steering wheel covers, the deactivation system
dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars and the When transporting older children and adults, the
sides of the headliner.◀ front passenger airbags may be deactivated in
Even when all instructions are followed closely, certain sitting positions. In this case, the indica‐
injury from contact with the airbags cannot be tor lamp for the front passenger airbags lights
ruled out in certain situations. up.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to In this case, change the sitting position so that
short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐ the front passenger airbags are activated and
ing impairment in sensitive individuals. the indicator lamp goes out.
In the case of a malfunction, deactivation If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
and after triggering of the airbags the person sit in the rear.
Do not touch the individual components imme‐ To make sure that the occupied seat cushion
can be evaluated correctly
Mobility
diately after the system has been triggered; oth‐

erwise, there is the danger of burns. ▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or
Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐ other items to the front passenger seat un‐
mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by less they are specifically recommended by
your service center or a workshop that has the the manufacturer of your vehicle.
necessary authorization for handling explosives. ▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
Reference
could press against the seat from below.
87
Indicator lamp for the front passenger
Safety corresponding message appears on the Control
airbags Display.
Calibrating the front seats

A corresponding message appears on the Con‐
trol Display.
1. Move the respective seat forward all the

way.
2. Move the respective seat forward again. It
moves forward briefly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐
bags indicates the operating state of the front The calibration procedure is completed when
passenger airbags. the message on the Control Display disappears.
The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac‐ If the message continues to be displayed, repeat
tivated or deactivated. the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a repeat
▷ The indicator lamp lights up
calibration, have the system checked as soon as
when a child who is properly
possible.
seated in a child restraint fix‐
ing system intended for that Unobstructed area of movement
purpose is detected on the Ensure that the area of movement of the
seat or the seat is empty. The seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury or
airbags on the front passen‐ damage to objects.◀
ger side are not activated.
▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,
for example, a correctly seated person of Tire Pressure Monitor TPM*
sufficient size is detected on the seat. The
airbags on the front passenger side are ac‐ The concept
tivated.
Monitoring of the tire inflation pressure in the
Most child seats are detected by the system, four mounted tires. The system notifies you if
especially the child seats required by the there is a significant loss of pressure in one or
NHTSA at the time the vehicle was manufac‐ more tires.
tured. After installing a child seat, make sure that
the indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐ Conditions for operation
bags lights up. This indicates that the child seat
The system must have been reset when the in‐
has been detected and the front passenger air‐
flation pressure was correct; otherwise, reliable
bags are not activated.
signaling of a flat tire is not ensured. Always use
wheels with TPM electronics to ensure that the
Strength of the driver's and front
system will operate properly. Reset the system
passenger airbag
after each correction of the tire inflation pres‐
The strength with which the driver's and front sure and after every tire or wheel change.
passenger airbags are triggered depends on the
position of the driver's and front passenger System limits
seats.
Sudden tire damage
To maintain the accuracy of this function over
the long-term, calibrate the front seats when a
88
Sudden serious tire damage caused by external Resetting the system
At a glance
influences cannot be indicated in advance.◀ Reset the system after each correction of the
The system does not operate correctly if it has tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
not been reset. For example, a flat tire may be wheel change.
indicated despite correct tire inflation pres‐
1. "Vehicle Info"
sures.
2. "Vehicle status"
The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat
tire: 3. "Reset TPM"
Controls
▷ For a mounted wheel without TPM electron‐
ics.
▷ When the TPM is disturbed by other sys‐
tems or devices with the same radio fre‐
quency.
Driving tips
Status display
The tire and system status is indicated by the
color of the tires.
4. Start the engine - do not drive away.
A change in the tire inflation pressure during
driving is taken into account. 5. Reset the tire pressure using "Reset".
Navigation
A correction is only necessary if indicated by 6. Drive away.
TPM. The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting
TPM..." is displayed.
Green After driving for a few minutes, the set tire infla‐
The tire inflation pressure is equal to the target tion pressures are applied as set values. The re‐
state. setting process is completed automatically dur‐
ing driving. The tires are shown in green and
One wheel is yellow "TPM active" is shown on the Control Display.
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in The trip can be interrupted at any time. If you
the indicated tire. drive away again, the process resumes auto‐
matically.
All wheels are yellow If a flat tire is detected during a reset, all tires are
▷ A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure displayed in yellow.
in several tires.
▷ The system was not reset after a wheel Low tire pressure message
change and thus warns based on the infla‐ The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
tion pressures initialized last. message appears on the Control Dis‐
play. In addition, a signal sounds.
Gray ▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire in‐
The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons for
Mobility
flation pressure.
this may be: ▷ The system was not reset after a wheel
▷ TPM is being reset. change and thus warns based on the infla‐
▷ Disturbance by systems or devices with the tion pressures initialized last.
same radio frequency. Cautiously reduce the vehicle speed to below
▷ Malfunction. 50 mph/80 km/h.
Reference
89
Safety Do not continue driving without run-flat 1. "Vehicle Info"
tires 2. "Vehicle status"
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM"
equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving
may result in serious accidents.◀
Continued driving with a flat tire

Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
▷ With a light load: 1 to 2 people without lug‐
gage: approx. 90 miles/150 km.
▷ With a medium load: 2 people, trunk full, or
4 people without luggage: approx. 50 miles/ The status is displayed.
80 km.
▷ With a full load: 4 people, trunk full: approx. Malfunction
30 miles/50 km. The yellow warning lamp flashes and
Continued driving with a flat tire then lights up continuously. The tires are
Drive moderately and do not exceed a displayed in gray on the Control Display.
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. No flat tire can be detected.
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a Display in the following situations:
change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐ ▷ Malfunction: have the system checked.
duced lane stability during braking, a longer ▷ A wheel without wheel electronics is fitted:
braking distance and altered self-steering prop‐ have the service center check it if necessary.
erties.◀
▷ Disturbance by systems or devices with the
Final tire failure same radio frequency: after leaving the area
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can of the disturbance, the system automatically
indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed becomes active again.
and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
come loose and cause an accident. Do not con‐ should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
tinue driving, and contact your service center.◀ flated to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
Message when not reset or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A tires of a different size than the size indicated on
message appears on the Control Dis‐ the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la‐
play. bel, you should determine the proper tire infla‐
The system was not reset, e.g., after a wheel tion pressure for those tires.) As an added safety
change. feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a
tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that il‐
Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the
luminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
system.
or more of your tires is significantly under-in‐
flated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
Status display
telltale illuminates, you should stop and check
The current status of the Tire Pressure Monitor your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them
TPM can be displayed on the Control Display, to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
e.g., whether or not the TPM is active. under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
90
and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
At a glance
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and wheel change.
may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping
ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a sub‐ System limits
stitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the Sudden tire damage
driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire
Sudden serious tire damage caused by
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached
external influences cannot be indicated in ad‐
the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
vance.◀
tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been
Controls
equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires can‐
indicate when the system is not operating prop‐ not be detected.
erly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is com‐ The system could be delayed or malfunction in
bined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the following situations:
the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will ▷ When the system has not been initialized.
Driving tips
flash for approximately one minute and then re‐
main continuously illuminated. This sequence ▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road
will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups surface.
as long as the malfunction exists. When the mal‐ ▷ Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels,
function indicator is illuminated, the system may high lateral acceleration.
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure ▷ When driving with snow chains*.
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for
Navigation
a variety of reasons, including the installation of Initialization
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
The initialization process adopts the set inflation
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
tire pressures as reference values for the detec‐
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
tion of a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
firming the inflation pressures.
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re‐
placement or alternate tires and wheels allow Do not initialize the system when driving with
the TPMS to continue to function properly. snow chains*.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
FTM Flat Tire Monitor*
3. "Reset"
The concept 4. Start the engine - do not drive away.
The system detects a pressure loss on the basis 5. Start the initialization with "Reset".
of speed differences between the individual 6. Drive away.
wheels while driving.
The initialization is completed while driving,
In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter and which can be interrupted at any time.
therefore the rotational speed of the corre‐
The initialization automatically continues when
sponding wheel change. This is detected and
driving resumes.
reported as a flat tire.
Mobility
Indication of a flat tire

Functional requirements
The yellow warning lamp and the vehicle
The system must have been initialized when the
symbol light up. A message appears on
tire inflation pressure was correct; otherwise,
the Control Display. In addition, a signal
reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured. In‐
sounds.
itialize the system after each correction of the
Reference
91
Safety There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation ▷ With a full load: 4 people, trunk full: approx.
pressure. 30 miles/50 km.
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. If there is minor tire damage, especially on the
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ tire tread, the distance that you can travel with
vers. the damaged tire can be extended.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with reg‐ After notification, inflate the damaged tire to a
ular tires* or run-flat tires*. maximum of 3.5 bar at the next opportunity.
Run-flat tires are labeled with a circular sym‐ Do not reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. The ex‐
bol containing the letters RSC marked on isting flat tire notification will continue to act as
the tire sidewall. a reminder of the defective tire. The procedure
can be repeated several times.
Normal tires* Continued driving with a flat tire
1. Identify the damaged wheel. Drive moderately and do not exceed a
If an identification is not possible, please speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
contact the service center. A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
2. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐
next opportunity. duced lane stability during braking, a longer
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is braking distance and altered self-steering prop‐
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have erties.◀
been initialized. In this case, initialize the Final tire failure
system. Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed
Run-flat tires* and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could
1. Carefully reduce your speed to a maximum come loose and cause an accident. Do not con‐
of 50 mph/80 km/h. tinue driving, and contact your service center.◀
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers. Status display
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can
be displayed on the Control Display, e.g.,
Do not continue driving without run- whether or not the FTM is active.
flat tires
1. "Vehicle Info"
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not
equipped with run-flat tires; continued driv‐ 2. "Vehicle status"
ing may result in serious accidents.◀ 3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
2. Repair the puncture.
Continued driving with a flat tire

Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
▷ With a light load: 1 to 2 people without lug‐
gage: approx. 90 miles/150 km.
▷ With a medium load: 2 people, trunk full, or
4 people without luggage: approx. 50 miles/
80 km. The status is displayed.
92
Lane departure warning* Issued warning
At a glance
If you leave the lane and if a lane line has been
The concept detected, the steering wheel begins vibrating.
This system issues a warning at speeds above If the turn signal is set before changing the lane,
approx. 40 mph/65 km/h if the vehicle is about a warning is not issued.
to leave the lane on roads with lane lines.
The steering wheel begins vibrating gently. End of warning
The warning ends:
Controls
The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set before leaving the lane. ▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
▷ When returning to your own lane.
Switching on/off
▷ When braking hard.
▷ When using the turn signal.
Driving tips
System limits
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver's personal judgment of the course
of the road and the traffic situation.
Navigation
In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steering
Press the button. wheel, as you may lose control of the vehicle.◀
The system may not be fully functional in the
▷ On: the LED lights up. following situations:
▷ Off: the LED goes out. ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
The system can issue warnings at speeds above ▷ In the event of worn, poorly visible, merging,
approx. 40 mph/65 km/h. diverging, or multiple lines such as in con‐
struction areas.
The state is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use. ▷ When lane lines are covered in snow, ice, dirt
or water.
Display ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ When the lines are covered by objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc.
Mobility
Malfunctions
▷ Lines, arrow 1: the system is activated.
▷ Arrows, arrow 2: at least one lane line was Steering wheel vibration
detected and warnings can be issued.
Frequent activation of the steering wheel vibra‐
tion causes the system to overheat.
Reference
93
Safety This causes the lane departure warning to be‐ The lamp in the housing of the exterior mirror
come deactivated. flashes and the steering wheel vibrates.
Let the system cool and reactivate it by pressing
the button. Switching on/off
Camera
Press the button.
The camera is located on the front of the interior ▷ On: the LED lights up.
rearview mirror. ▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Keep the area in front of the interior rearview The system can issue warnings at speeds above
mirror clear. approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.
rently in use.
Active Blind Spot Detection*
Display
The concept
Two radar sensors below the rear bumper mon‐ Information stage
itor the area behind and next to the vehicle at The dimmed lamp in the mirror housing indi‐
speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h. cates when there are vehicles in the blind spot
The system indicates whether there are vehicles or approaching from behind.
in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching from
behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2. Warning
The lamp in the exterior mirror housing lights up If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the
dimly. critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly
and the lamp in the mirror housing flashes
Before you change lanes after setting the turn brightly.
signal, the system issues a warning in the situa‐
tions described above.
94
The warning stops when the turn signal is ▷ Stickers on the bumper.
At a glance
switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the crit‐ A message is displayed when the system is not
ical zone. fully functional.
System limits
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
The system cannot serve as a substitute part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic Commission regulations. Operation is governed
Controls
situation. by the following:
In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steering FCC ID:
wheel, as you may lose control over the vehi‐
▷ NBG009014A.
cle.◀
The function may be limited in the following sit‐
Driving tips
uations: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
conditions:
much faster than your own.
▷ This device may not cause harmful interfer‐
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
ence, and
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ this device must accept any interference re‐
ceived, including interference that may
Navigation
Malfunctions
cause undesired operation.
Steering wheel vibration Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
Frequent activation of the steering wheel vibra‐
operate this equipment.
tion causes the system to overheat.
This causes Active Blind Spot Detection to be‐
come deactivated.
Brake force display*
Let the system cool and reactivate it by pressing
the button. The concept
Radar sensors
▷ During normal brake application, the outer

Mobility
brake lamps light up.

The radar sensors are located under the rear
▷ During heavy brake application, the inner
bumper.
brake lamps light up in addition.
following situations:
▷ Dirty or icy bumper.
Reference
95
Driving stability control systems
Driving stability control systems
Antilock Brake System ABS Adjust your driving style to the situation
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during brak‐ An appropriate driving style is always the
ing. responsibility of the driver.
The vehicle remains steerable even during full The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even
brake applications, thus increasing active with DSC.
safety. Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐ margin by driving in a risky manner.◀
gine.
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐
Brake assistant trols the drive forces and brake forces.
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has
automatically produces the maximum braking failed.
force boost. It thus helps to achieve the shortest
possible braking distance during full braking. Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re‐
by ABS. duced during acceleration and when driving in
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal bends.
for the duration of the full braking. Stabilizing interventions by the Integral Active
Steering* system are only performed by the rear
axle steering.
Adaptive brake assistant To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
In combination with the Active Cruise Control, as soon as possible.
this system ensures that the brakes respond
even more rapidly when braking in critical situa‐ Deactivating DSC
tions. Refer also to Collision warning, refer to Press and hold the button, but not lon‐
page 107. ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
indicator lamp for the DSC lights up in the in‐
strument cluster and DSC OFF is displayed in
DSC Dynamic Stability the tachometer.
Control The DSC system is switched off.
The concept Activating DSC

DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels Press the button.
when driving away and accelerating.
DSC OFF and the DSC indicator lamp
DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐ go out.
tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Subject
to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the vehicle
on a steady course by reducing engine speed
and by applying brakes at individual wheels. When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐
played in the tachometer.
96
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is de‐ Indicator/warning lamps
At a glance
activated. When DTC is activated, TRACTION is displayed
in the tachometer.
The indicator lamp lights up: DTC Dy‐

DTC Dynamic Traction namic Traction Control is activated.
Control
Controls
The concept Dynamic Drive*
The DTC system is a version of the DSC in which
forward momentum is optimized. The concept
The system ensures maximum forward momen‐ Dynamic Drive reduces the lateral inclination of
tum on special road conditions, e.g., unplowed the vehicle that occurs during rapid driving in
Driving tips
snowy roads, but driving stability is limited. curves or during quick evasive maneuvers.
It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri‐ Driving stability and driving comfort are in‐
ate caution. creased under all driving conditions. The system
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC un‐ utilizes active stabilizer bars on the front and rear
der the following special circumstances: axles that react immediately to all driving situa‐
tions.
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,
Navigation
snow-covered roads.
Programs
▷ When rocking the vehicle or driving off in
The system offers two different programs.
deep snow or on loose surfaces.
The programs can be selected via Dynamic Driv‐
▷ When driving with snow chains.
ing Control, refer to page 98.
Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic
SPORT
Traction Control
Sporty tuning for greater driving agility.
Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC
provides maximum traction on loose ground.
NORMAL
The TRACTION* program is activated. Driving
stability is limited during acceleration and when Comfort-oriented tuning for optimal comfort.
driving in bends.
Activating DTC Dynamic Damping Control*

Press the button.
The concept
TRACTION is displayed in the tachom‐
eter. This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐
tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐
The DSC indicator lamp in the instrument clus‐ eling on uneven road surfaces.
ter lights up.
The system enhances driving dynamics and
Mobility
comfort as required for the road surface and

Deactivating DTC driving style.
Press the button again.
TRACTION and the DSC indicator lamp
Programs
go out. The system offers three different programs.
Reference
97
Driving stability control systems The programs can be selected via Dynamic Driv‐ The warning lamp lights up. A message
ing Control, refer to page 98. appears on the Control Display.
SPORT 1. With the engine running, turn the steering

Consistently sporty tuning of the shock absorb‐ wheel all the way to the left and right several
ers for greater driving agility. times in a uniform manner until the warning
lamp disappears.
NORMAL 2. Have the system checked if the warning
Balanced tuning between the COMFORT and lamp does not go out after moving the steer‐
SPORT programs. ing wheel approx. 6 times or if the steering
wheel is at an angle.
COMFORT
Comfort-oriented tuning of the shock absorbers Using snow chains
for optimal traveling comfort. Ensure that the rear axle steering is deactivated
when using snow chains, refer to page 229.
Integral Active Steering* Programs

The system offers two different programs.
The concept The programs can be selected via Dynamic Driv‐
Integral Active Steering is a combination of Ac‐ ing Control, refer to page 98.
tive Steering and rear axle steering.
Active Steering varies the steering angle of the SPORT
wheels in relation to the steering wheel move‐ Consistently sporty tuning of the Integral Active
ment as a function of the speed. Steering for greater driving agility.
At speeds up to approx. 37 mph/60 km/h, e.g.,
in curves, the steering angle is increased, i.e., NORMAL
steering becomes more direct. Balanced tuning of the Integral Active Steering
The rear axle steering acts to increase maneu‐ for optimal traveling comfort.
verability by turning the rear wheels slightly in a
direction opposite to the front wheels. Malfunction
At higher speeds, the steering angle is increas‐ In the event of a malfunction, the steering wheel
ingly reduced. must be turned further, while the vehicle re‐
sponds more sensitively to steering wheel
The rear wheels are turned to the same angle as
movements in the higher speed range.
the front wheels.
The stability-enhancing intervention may be de‐
In critical situations, Integral Active Steering can
activated.
specifically steer the front and rear wheels to
stabilize the vehicle before the driver intervenes, Proceed cautiously and drive defensively.
e.g., when braking where road conditions differ Have the system checked.
on the left and right sides of the vehicle.
Initializing Dynamic Driving Control*

In rare cases, it may become necessary to initi‐
alize the Integral Active Steering. The concept
Dynamic Driving Control can be used to adjust
the driving dynamics of the vehicle. Several pro‐
98
grams are available for this purpose; they can be Activating SPORT+
At a glance
activated using the two Dynamic Driving Control Press the button repeatedly until
buttons. SPORT+ appears in the tachometer
and the DSC indicator lamp lights up in the in‐
Operating the programs strument cluster.
Press the button Program

DSC OFF SPORT+ is displayed in the tachometer.
Controls
TRACTION
The indicator lamp lights up: DTC Dy‐
SPORT+ namic Traction Control is activated.
SPORT
NORMAL SPORT
Driving tips
COMFORT* Consistently sporty tuning of the suspension for
greater driving agility with maximum driving sta‐
bilization.
For Dynamic Damper Control*, the lower button
is labeled with COMFORT. The program can be configured to individual
specifications.
Automatic program change The configuration is stored for the remote con‐
Navigation
The system automatically switches to NORMAL trol currently in use.
in the following situations:
▷ Failure of Integral Active Steering*.
Activating SPORT
Press the button repeatedly until
▷ Failure of Dynamic Damping Control*.
SPORT+ appears in the tachometer.
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
DSC OFF Configuring SPORT

When the display is activated on the Control
When DSC OFF, refer to page 96, is active, driv‐
Display, refer to page 100, the sport program
ing stability is limited during acceleration and
can be set to individual specifications.
when driving in bends.
After the sport program is activated, select
TRACTION "Configure SPORT mode" on the displayed
panel and configure the program.
When TRACTION is active, the vehicle has max‐
imum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC Dy‐ Optionally, the sport program can be configured
namic Traction Control, refer to page 97, is ac‐ before it is activated:
tivated. Driving stability is limited during
1. "Settings"
acceleration and when driving in bends.
SPORT+
Mobility
Sporty driving with optimized chassis and sus‐

pension during limited driving stabilization.
Dynamic Traction Control is switched on.
The driver handles several of the stabilization
tasks.
Reference
99
Program selection
Driving stability control systems 2. "SPORT mode"
3. Configure the program. Pressing the button displays a list of the select‐
This configuration is retrieved when the sport able programs.
program is activated.
Display on the Control Display
NORMAL Program changes can be displayed briefly on
For a balanced tuning with maximum driving sta‐ the Control Display.
bilization. To do so, make the following settings:
Activating NORMAL 1. "Settings"

Press the button repeatedly until the 2. "Control display"
program display in the tachometer
goes out.
In certain situations, the system automatically

changes to the NORMAL program, automatic
program change, refer to page 99.
COMFORT*
Comfort-oriented tuning of the shock absorbers
for optimal traveling comfort with maximum
driving stabilization. 3. "Display driving settings"
Activating COMFORT
Press the button repeatedly until COM‐
FORT appears in the tachometer.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Selected program
The selected program is dis‐
played in the tachometer.
Drive-off assistant
This system supports driving away on gradients.
The parking brake is not required.
100
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.
At a glance
2. Release the foot brake and drive away with‐
out delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Depending on the vehicle load, the vehicle may
roll back slightly.
Controls
Driving off without delay
After releasing the foot brake, start driving
without delay, since the drive-off assistant will
not hold the vehicle in place for more than ap‐
prox. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin rolling
Driving tips
back.◀
Navigation
Mobility
Reference
101
Driving comfort
Driving comfort
Active Cruise Control with Buttons at a glance

Stop & Go function, ACC*
The concept
This system can be used to select a desired
speed that the vehicle will maintain automati‐
cally on clear roads.
To the extent possible, the system automatically
adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle ahead of
you.
1 System on/off, interrupt
The distance that the vehicle maintains to the
vehicle ahead of you can be varied. 2 Resume speed
For safety reasons, it depends on the speed. 3 Store speed*
To maintain a certain distance, the system au‐ 4 Increase distance
tomatically decelerates, applies the brakes 5 Store, maintain/change speed
lightly, or accelerates again if the vehicle ahead 6 Reduce distance
begins moving faster.
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, the Switching on/off and interrupting
system is able to detect this within the given cruise control
system limits. If the vehicle ahead of your drives
away again from a halt, your vehicle is able to Switching on
accelerate if operated accordingly. Press the button on the steering wheel.
Even if some time passes before the vehicle
drives away again, the BMW can still be accel‐ The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
erated automatically and simply. light up and the marking in the speedometer is
As soon as the road is clear, it accelerates to the set to the current speed.
desired speed. Cruise control can be used.
The speed is also maintained on downhill gra‐ When the speed limit is switched on, DSC Dy‐
dients, but may not be maintained on uphill namic Stability Control, refer to page 96, is
slopes if engine power is insufficient. switched on as well, if necessary.
Switching off
Deactivated or interrupted system
If the system is deactivated or interrupted,
actively intervene by braking and, if necessary,
with evasive maneuvers; otherwise, there is the
danger of an accident occurring.◀
If switching off the system while stationary,
press on the brake pedal at the same time.
102
Press the button. wise, there is the danger of an accident occur‐
At a glance
ring.◀
▷ If active: press twice. Speed differences
▷ If interrupted: press once. Great speed differences with vehicles
driving ahead of you, e.g., when rapidly ap‐
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
proaching a truck or when another vehicle
and distance are deleted.
swerves into your own lane, cannot be compen‐
sated for by the system.◀
Controls
Interrupting
When active, press the button.
If interrupting the system while stationary, press

on the brake pedal at the same time.
Driving tips
The system is automatically interrupted if:
▷ The brakes are applied.
▷ Transmission position D is disengaged.
▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated
or DSC is deactivated. Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
▷ DSC is actively controlling stability.
Navigation
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
▷ The safety belt and the driver's door are
vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is
opened when the vehicle is standing.
clear.
▷ The system has not detected objects for an
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the
extended period, e.g., on a road with very lit‐
point of resistance, the desired speed in‐
tle traffic without road edge line markings.
creases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/
▷ The radar sensor is dirty. 1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
Maintaining/storing the speed the point of resistance, the desired speed
Press the button. increases or decreases by a maximum of
5 mph/10 km/h. Max. adjustable speed:
When the system is switched on, the current 110 mph/180 km/h.
speed is maintained and stored as the desired Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the
speed. action.
It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly
displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in Distance
the instrument cluster, refer to page 104.
Selecting a distance
Maintaining, storing or changing the Adjust the distance according to the traffic
speed and weather conditions; otherwise, there is the
danger of an accident occurring. Maintain the
Mobility
The rocker switch can be pressed while the sys‐

prescribed safety distance.◀
tem is interrupted to maintain and store the cur‐
rent speed.
Reduce distance
Adapting the desired speed Press the button repeatedly until the
Adapt the desired speed to the road con‐ desired distance is set.
Reference
ditions and be ready to brake at all times; other‐
103
Driving comfort The selected distance, refer to page 104, is dis‐ 3. Press on the accelerator briefly, or press the
played in the instrument cluster. RES button or the rocker switch when the
vehicle ahead of you drives away.
Increase distance
Press the button repeatedly until the Displays in the instrument cluster
desired distance is set.
Desired speed
The selected distance, refer to page 104, is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster. Marking in the speedometer
▷ The marking lights up in
Calling up the desired speed and green: the system is active.
distance
▷ The marking lights up in or‐
While driving ange: the system has been
interrupted.
Press the button with the system
switched on. ▷ The marking does not light up: the system is
switched off.
In the following cases, the stored speed value is
deleted and cannot be called up again: Brief status display
▷ When the system is switched off. Selected desired speed
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
While standing If --- appears briefly on the display for Check

Control messages, it is possible that the system
Before leaving the vehicle
requirements for operation are currently not
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine met.
running, engage position P of the automatic
transmission and apply the parking brake. Oth‐ Distance to vehicle ahead of you
erwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.◀
The selected distance to the vehicle driving
▷ The vehicle was braked to a halt by the sys‐ ahead of you is shown.
tem.
Distance display
When the marking in the speedometer is or‐
ange: Distance 1
The vehicle ahead of you drives away: to ac‐
celerate, press on the accelerator briefly, or
press the RES button or the rocker switch. Distance 2
The marking turns green again and your ve‐
hicle follows the vehicle ahead of you.
Rolling bars in the distance indicator mean that Distance 3
the vehicle ahead of you has driven off.
▷ You actively braked your vehicle to a halt by Distance 4
pressing on the brake pedal and it is stand‐
ing behind another vehicle: This value is set after the system is
switched on.
1. Press the button to call up a stored
desired speed.
2. Release the brake pedal.
104
Distance display Detection range
At a glance
The system has been interrupted or
distance control is deactivated be‐
cause the accelerator is being
pressed; a vehicle was not detected.
Distance control is deactivated be‐

cause the accelerator is being
Controls
pressed; a vehicle was detected.
Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven

away. The detection capacity of the system and the
automatic braking capacity are limited.
Indicator/warning lamps Two-wheeled vehicles driving ahead of you
Driving tips
for instance might not be detected.
The indicator and warning lamps do not Limited detection capacity
relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt Because of the limits to the detection ca‐
his or her desired driving speed and style to the pacity, you should be alert at all times so that you
traffic conditions.◀ can intervene actively, if necessary; otherwise,
The vehicle symbol lights up in orange: there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀
Navigation
A vehicle has been detected ahead of
Deceleration
you.
The system does not decelerate when a sta‐
The vehicle symbol flashes orange: tionary obstacle is located in the same lane, e.g.,
The conditions are not adequate for op‐ a vehicle at a red traffic light or at the end of a
erating the system. traffic congestion.
The system was deactivated but applies the The system also does not respond to:
brakes until you actively assume control by ▷ Pedestrians or similarly slow road users.
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator.
▷ Red traffic lights.
The vehicle symbol flashes red and an ▷ Stationary objects.
acoustic signal sounds:
▷ Cross traffic.
You are requested to intervene by brak‐
▷ Approaching traffic.
ing or making an evasive maneuver.
No warnings
System limits A warning may not be issued when ap‐

proaching a stationary or very slow-moving ob‐
Speed range stacle. You must react yourself; otherwise, there
is the danger of an accident occurring.◀
Best results are achieved when using the sys‐
tem on well-developed roads and highways.
Mobility
The desired speed can be selected between

20 mph/30 km/h to 110 mph/180 km/h.
The system can also be activated when station‐
ary.
Comply with the legal speed limit in every situa‐
Reference
tion when using the system.
105
Swerving vehicles Cornering
Driving comfort
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the
until it is completely within the same lane as your speed is reduced slightly in the curve, although
vehicle. curves cannot be anticipated in advance. There‐
fore, drive into a curve at an appropriate speed.
Swerving vehicles
In tight curves, situations may result due to the
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
restricted detection range of the system in
swerves into your lane, the system may not be
which a vehicle driving ahead of you may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
detected at all, or not until after a considerable
tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐
delay.
ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g.,
when rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehi‐
cle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the
system requests that the driver intervene by
braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if
necessary. You must react yourself; otherwise,
there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀
Unexpected lane change
When approaching a curve, the system may re‐

act briefly to the vehicles in the next lane due to
the bend of the curve. Any deceleration of the
vehicle by the system can be compensated for
by briefly accelerating. After the accelerator
pedal is released, the system becomes active
again and independently controls the speed.
If a vehicle ahead of you unexpectedly moves Driving away

into your lane from behind a stopped vehicle, In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive
you yourself must react, as the system does not away automatically, e.g., on steep inclines or be‐
react to stopped vehicles. hind bumps in the road.
106
Radar sensor Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
At a glance
Position operate this equipment.
Collision warning with

braking function*
Controls
The concept
The system issues a two-phase warning of a
danger of collision at speeds above approx.
10 mph/15 km/h.
Radar sensor The collision warning is available even if cruise
Driving tips
control has been deactivated.
Dirty or covered sensor
A dirty or covered sensor may hinder the detec‐
tion of vehicles.
▷ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re‐
move layers of snow and ice carefully
Navigation
▷ Do not cover the view field of the radar sen‐
sor.
Malfunction
It responds to stationary or moving objects that
The system cannot be activated if the sensor is
are within the detection range of the radar sys‐
not aligned correctly. This may be caused by
tem.
damage incurred during parking, for example.
A message is displayed if the system fails. When the vehicle is intentionally brought into
contact with an object, the collision warning is
For US owners only delayed to avoid false warnings.
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Warning stages
Commission regulations. Operation is governed
by the following:
Prewarning
This warning is issued, for example, when there
FCC ID:
is the impending danger of a collision or the dis‐
▷ OAYARS3-A tance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Acute warning with braking function
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two Warning of the imminent danger of a collision
Mobility
conditions: when the vehicle approaches another object at

▷ This device may not cause harmful interfer‐ a relatively high differential speed.
ence, and The acute warning prompts the driver to inter‐
▷ this device must accept any interference re‐ vene and, if there is the danger of a collision, is
ceived, including interference that may accompanied by a braking intervention.
Reference
cause undesired operation.
107
Driving comfort The braking intervention is executed with lim‐ These settings have no effect on the time of the
ited braking force and for a brief period only. The warning from the Active Cruise Control* that
intervention cannot bring the vehicle to a com‐ prompts the driver to intervene or brake.
plete standstill.
The braking intervention is executed only if DSC Display
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 96, is The collision warning can be issued in the in‐
switched on. strument cluster, in the Head-up Display* and
acoustically.
Adapting your speed and driving style
The acute warning does not relieve the Instrument cluster
driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her
The vehicle lights up in red: prewarning
driving speed and style to the traffic condi‐
tions.◀
The braking intervention can be interrupted by The vehicle flashes red and an acoustic
pressing on the accelerator or by actively mov‐ signal sounds: acute warning
ing the steering wheel. You are requested to intervene by brak‐
When towing or tow-starting the vehicle, switch ing or making an evasive maneuver.
off the collision warning with the braking func‐
Adapting your speed and driving style
tion to prevent accidental interventions.
The display does not relieve the driver of
The braking function is deactivated if the DSC
the responsibility to adapt his or her driving
Dynamic Stability Control or DTC Dynamic
speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀
Traction Control is deactivated.
Switching the warning function on/off System limits

Be alert
Due to system limitations, warnings may
be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or
improperly. Therefore, always be alert and ready
to intervene; otherwise, there is the danger of an
accident occurring.◀
Detection range
The detection capacity of the radar sensor and
the collision warning has limitations.
Press the button
This may result in the warning not being issued
▷ On: the LED lights up. or being issued late.
▷ Off: the LED goes out. For example, the following situations may not be
detected:
rently in use. ▷ Slow moving objects when you approach
them at high speed.
Configuring the prewarning ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
After the warning function is switched on, the your vehicle.
following can be set via the iDrive: ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
▷ The prewarning can be switched on/off. ▷ Pedestrians.
▷ The time of the prewarning can be set.
108
Functional limitations Controls
At a glance
following situations: Buttons at a glance
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the radar sensor is dirty or covered.
Controls
Prewarning sensitivity
If the prewarning setting is too sensitive, there
may be an excess of false warnings.
1 System on/off, interrupt

Cruise control
Driving tips
2 Resume speed
The concept 3 Store speed*
The system is functional at speeds beginning at 4 Store, maintain/change speed
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
It maintains the speed that was set using the Switching on
control elements on the steering wheel. Press the button on the steering wheel.
Navigation
The system brakes on downhill gradients if en‐
gine braking action is insufficient. The marking in the speedometer is set to the
current speed.
Unfavorable conditions
Cruise control can be used.
Do not use the system if unfavorable con‐
When the speed limit is switched on, DSC Dy‐
ditions make it impossible to drive at a constant
namic Stability Control, refer to page 96, is
speed, for instance:
switched on as well, if necessary.
▷ On curvy roads.
▷ In heavy traffic. Switching off
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or on Deactivated or interrupted system
a loose road surface. If the system is deactivated or interrupted,
Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle actively intervene by braking and, if necessary,
and cause an accident.◀ with evasive maneuvers; otherwise, there is the
danger of an accident occurring.◀
Press the button.
▷ If active: press twice.

▷ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
Mobility
is deleted.
Interrupting
When active, press the button.
Reference
The system is automatically interrupted if:
109
Driving comfort ▷ The brakes are applied. ▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance
▷ Transmission position D is disengaged. point and holding it accelerates or deceler‐
ates the vehicle without requiring pressure
▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated
on the accelerator. After the rocker switch is
or DSC is deactivated.
released, the vehicle maintains its final
▷ DSC is actively controlling stability. speed. Pressing the switch beyond the re‐
sistance point causes the vehicle to accel‐
Maintaining/storing the current speed erate more rapidly.
Press the button. The rocker switch can be pressed while inter‐
rupted to maintain and store the current speed.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired Resuming the desired speed
speed. Press the button.
It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly
displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in The stored speed is reached and maintained.
the speedometer, refer to page 110.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Change, maintain speed
Adapting the desired speed
Adapt the desired speed to the road con‐
ditions and be ready to brake at all times; other‐
wise, there is the danger of an accident occur‐
ring.◀
1 Display of desired speed

2 Indicator lamp
3 Brief status display
Desired speed
Display in the speedometer:
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set. ▷ The marking lights up in
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the green: the system is active.
vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is ▷ The marking lights up in or‐
clear. ange: the system has been
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the interrupted.
point of resistance, the desired speed in‐ ▷ The marking does not light up: the system is
creases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/ switched off.
1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past Brief status display
the point of resistance, the desired speed Brief display in the speedometer:
increases or decreases by a maximum of
5 mph/10 km/h.
110
Selected desired speed For technical reasons, the system may other‐
At a glance
wise be too late in issuing a warning.◀
If --- appears briefly, conditions may not be ad‐ Limits of ultrasonic measurement
equate to operate the system. The detection of objects can reach the physical
limits of ultrasonic measurement, for instance:
▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches.
PDC Park Distance Control* ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
Controls
The concept ▷ With low objects.
In addition to the PDC Park Distance Control, the ▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
backup camera*, refer to page 113, can be Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
switched on. move into the blind area of the sensors before or
Driving tips
PDC supports you when parking. Objects that after a continuous tone sounds.
you are approaching slowly in front of or behind High, protruding objects such as ledges may not
your vehicle are indicated with: be detected.
▷ Signal tones.
False warnings
▷ Visual display.
PDC may issue a warning under the following
Measurement conditions even though there is no obstacle
Navigation
within the detection range:
Measurements are made by ultrasound sensors
in the bumpers. ▷ In heavy rain.
The range is approx. 6 ft/2 m. ▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered in
ice.
An acoustic warning is first given:
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
▷ By the front* sensors and two rear corner
sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm. ▷ On rough road surfaces.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx. 5 ft/ ▷ In large buildings with right angles and
1.50 m. smooth walls, e.g., in underground garages.
▷ In heavy exhaust.
System limits ▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,
Check the traffic situation as well sweeping machines, high pressure steam
PDC cannot serve as a substitute for the cleaners or neon lights.
driver's personal judgment of the traffic situa‐
tion. Check the traffic situation around the vehi‐ Switching on automatically
cle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident Select transmission position R with the engine
could result from road users or objects located running.
outside of the PDC detection range.
Loud noises from outside and inside the vehicle Switching off automatically
Mobility
may prevent you from hearing the PDC's signal The system switches off and the LED goes out:
tone.◀ ▷ After approx. 160 ft/50 m when driving for‐
Avoid driving quickly with PDC ward.
Avoid approaching an object quickly. ▷ Above approx. 22 mph/36 km/h when driv‐
Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yet ing forward.
Reference
active. Switch on the system again if necessary.
111
Switching on/off manually
Driving comfort The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can be
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
farther away are displayed on the Control Dis‐
play before a signal tone sounds.
Press the button.

▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Signal tones
When approaching an object, an intermittent
A display appears as soon as Park Distance
tone is sounded that indicates the position of the
Control (PDC) is activated.
object. For example, if an object is detected to
the left rear of the vehicle, a signal tone sounds Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
from the left rear speaker. screen mask can also be turned by 90°.
The shorter the distance to the object becomes, If the backup camera image was selected last, it
the shorter the intervals. again appears on the display. To switch to PDC:
If the distance to a detected object is less than 1. "Rear view camera" Select the symbol
approx. 12 in/30 cm, a continuous tone is on the Control Display.
sounded.
If objects are located both in front of and behind
the vehicle, an alternating continuous signal is
rently in use.
sounded.
The intermittent tone is interrupted after approx. Zoom view*
3 seconds:
On the left part of the display screen, the vehicle
▷ If the vehicle stops in front of an object that is shown enlarged.
is detected by only one of the corner sen‐
sors.
▷ If moving parallel to a wall.
The signal tone is switched off:
▷ When the vehicle moves away from an ob‐
ject by more than approx. 4 in/10 cm.
▷ When transmission position P is engaged.
Volume
You can set the volume of the PDC signal tone, ▷ Transmission position D engaged: front
refer to page 171. area of the vehicle.
112
▷ Forward gear engaged: front area of the ve‐ Surround View*
At a glance
hicle.
▷ Transmission position R engaged: rear area The concept
of the vehicle. Surround View includes the following systems:
▷ Reverse gear engage: rear area of the vehi‐ ▷ Backup camera, refer to page 113
cle.
▷ Side View, refer to page 117.
Display on the Control Display ▷ Top View, refer to page 115.
Controls
It assists the driver when parking, maneuvering
Switching on the backup camera via the and on blind driveways and intersections.
iDrive
With PDC activated:
Backup camera*
1. "Rear view camera" Select the symbol.
Driving tips
2. Press the controller. The concept
The backup camera image is displayed. The set‐ The backup camera provides assistance in park‐
ting is stored for the remote control currently in ing and maneuvering backwards. The area be‐
use. hind the vehicle is shown on the Control Display.
Malfunction System limits
Navigation
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the Check the traffic situation as well
screen mask can also be turned by 90°. Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident
could result from road users or objects located
outside the picture area of the backup cam‐
era.◀
Detection of objects
High, protruding objects such as ledges
may not be detected by the backup camera.◀
Switching on automatically
A Check Control message, refer to page 79, is Select transmission position R with the engine
displayed in the instrument cluster. running.
On the Control Display, the areas in front of and The backup camera image is displayed if the
behind the vehicle are shaded. PDC has failed. system was switched on via the iDrive.
Have the system checked.
To ensure full operability: Switching off automatically
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. The system switches off and the LED goes out:
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not ▷ After approx. 33 ft/10 m when driving for‐
Mobility
spray the sensors for long periods and main‐ ward.

tain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm. ▷ After approx. 9 mph/15 km/h when driving
forward.
Switch on the system again if necessary.
Reference
113
Switching on/off manually Turning circle lines
Driving comfort
Press the button. ▷ Can be shown in the backup camera image.

▷ Show the course of the smallest possible
▷ On: the LED lights up. turning circle on a level road.
▷ Off: the LED goes out. ▷ Only one turning circle line is displayed
The PDC is shown on the Control Display. when the steering wheel is turned.
Switch on the backup camera via the iDrive, refer Show the parking aid lines, refer to page 115.
to page 115.
Parking using pathway and turning
Assistance functions circle lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning circle
Functional requirement lines lead to within the limits of the parking
▷ The backup camera is switched on. space.
▷ The trunk lid is fully closed.
Pathway lines
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where

the pathway line covers the corresponding
turning circle line.
▷ Can be shown in the backup camera image
when in transmission position R.
▷ Help you to estimate the space required
when parking and maneuvering on level
roads.
▷ Are dependent on the current steering angle
and are continuously adjusted to the steer‐
ing wheel movements.
Show the parking aid lines, refer to page 115.
114
Obstacle marking 1. Select the symbol.
At a glance
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Contrast
With the backup camera switched on:
1. Select the symbol.
Controls
▷ Spatially-shaped markings can be shown in
the backup camera image. Camera
Their colored steps match the markings of the
Driving tips
PDC. This simplifies estimation of the distance
to the object shown.
Activating the assistance functions

More than one assistance function can be active
at the same time.
Navigation
Showing the parking aid lines
The camera lens is located in the handle of the
1. "Parking aid lines" Select the symbol.
trunk lid. The image quality may be impaired by
2. Press the controller. dirt.
Pathway and turning circle lines are displayed. Clean the lens, refer to page 251.
Showing the obstacle marking
1. "Obstacle marking" Select the symbol.
Top View*
Spatially-shaped markings are displayed. The concept
Top View assists you in parking and maneuver‐
Display on the Control Display ing. The area around the doors and the road area
around the vehicle are shown on the Control
Switching on the backup camera via the Display for this purpose.
iDrive
With PDC activated: Capturing the image
The image is captured by two cameras inte‐
grated in the exterior mirrors and by the backup
2. Press the controller. camera.
Mobility
The backup camera image is displayed. The set‐ The range equals:
ting is stored for the remote control currently in
▷ approx. 10 ft/3 m to the side.
use.
▷ approx. 7 ft/2 m to the rear.
Brightness In this way, obstacles up to the height of the ex‐
With the backup camera switched on: terior mirrors are detected early.
Reference
115
System limits
Driving comfort If Top View is displayed, switch on the backup
Top View cannot be used in the following situa‐ camera via the iDrive, refer to page 116.
tions:
Visual warning
▷ With a door open.
The approach of the vehicle to an object can be
▷ With the trunk lid open.
shown on the Control Display.
▷ With an exterior mirror folded in.
When the distance to an object is small, a red bar
▷ In poor light. is shown in front of the vehicle, as it is in the PDC
A Check Control message is displayed in some display.
of these situations.
Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident
could result from road users or objects located
outside the picture area of the cameras.◀
Switching on automatically
Select transmission position R with the engine
running. The display appears as soon as Top View is ac‐
tivated.
The Top View and PDC images are displayed if
the system is switched on via iDrive. If the backup camera image was selected last, it
again appears on the display. To switch to Top
Switching off automatically View:
The system switches off and the LED goes out: 1. "Rear view camera" Select the symbol
▷ After approx. 160 ft/50 m when driving for‐ on the Control Display.
ward. 2. Press the controller.
▷ Above approx. 22 mph/36 km/h when driv‐ The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
ing forward. rently in use.
Switching on the backup camera via the
iDrive
With Top View switched on:

The backup camera image is displayed. The set‐
ting is stored for the remote control currently in
use.
Press the button.

Brightness
With Top View switched on:
▷ Off: the LED goes out. 1. Select the symbol.
116
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting Side View*
At a glance
The concept
Contrast
Side View provides an early look at cross traffic
With Top View switched on: at blind driveways and intersections. Road users
1. Select the symbol. concealed by obstacles to the left and right of
the vehicle can only be detected relatively late
from the driver's seat. To improve visibility, two
Controls
cameras in the front of the vehicle record the
traffic situation on each side.
Displaying the turning circle and
pathway lines System limits
▷ The static, red turning circle line shows the
The cameras capture a maximum range of
space needed to the side of the vehicle
Driving tips
330 ft/100 m.
when the steering wheel is turned all the
way.
Display
▷ The variable, green pathway line assists you
The images from both cameras are shown si‐
in assessing the amount of space actually
multaneously on the Control Display.
needed to the side of the vehicle.
The pathway line is dependent on the cur‐ Check the traffic situation as well
Navigation
rent steering angle and is continuously ad‐ Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
justed with the steering wheel movement. hicle on blind driveways and intersections with
1. Select the symbol. your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could re‐
sult from road users or objects located outside
the picture area of the Side View cameras.◀
Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed.
Switching off automatically
Cameras System switches off: above approx. 9 mph/
15 km/h.
The objectives of the Top View cameras are lo‐

cated at the bottom of the exterior mirror hous‐
ings. The image quality may be impaired by dirt.
Mobility
Clean the lens, refer to page 251.

Press the button.
Reference
117
Display on the Control Display Parking assistant*
Driving comfort
The traffic area to the left and right is displayed
on the Control Display. The concept
Guidelines at the bottom of the image show the This system assists the driver in parking parallel
position of the front of the vehicle. to the road.
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on
Brightness both sides of the vehicle.
With the Side View switched on: The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐
sible parking line and takes control of steering
during the parking procedure.
When parking, also take note of the visual and
acoustic information issued by the PDC and the
parking assistant and accelerate or brake ac‐
Contrast cordingly.
With the Side View switched on:
A component of the parking assistant is the PDC
1. Select the symbol. Park Distance Control*, refer to page 111.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting Personal responsibility
The parking assistant does not relieve the
driver of responsibility for the vehicle during the
Cameras parking procedure.
Watch the parking space and parking procedure
closely and intervene if necessary; otherwise,
there is the danger of an accident.◀
Requirements
For measuring parking spaces

▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.
The two camera lenses are located on the sides
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐
of the bumper.
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt.
Clean the lens, refer to page 251. Suitable parking space
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
118
▷ Minimum length: own vehicle length plus
At a glance
approx. 4 ft/1.2 m.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
For parking procedure

Closed doors.
Switching on
Controls
Using the button Gray: the system is not activated.
Parking space search.
Blue: the system is activated. A
suitable parking space was
found.
Driving tips
The parking procedure is active.
Steering control has been seized.
Press the button.
Navigation
Status of the parking space search
The LED lights up.
The parking assistant is activated automati‐
cally.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
By engaging reverse
Shift into reverse or engage transmission posi‐
tion R*.
The current status of the parking space search ▷ Gray, arrow 1: parking space search.
is indicated on the Control Display. ▷ Blue, arrow 2: parking space is suitable.
Activate: "Parking Assistant"Select the sym‐ The vehicle is parked in the parking space if
bol in the Control Display. the parking procedure is active.
▷ No display: no parking space search.
Parking using the parking assistant
System status
Symbol Meaning The parking assistant does not relieve the
Mobility
driver of responsibility for the vehicle during the

Gray: the system is not available. parking procedure.
White: the system is available but not Watch the parking space and parking procedure
activated. closely and intervene if necessary; otherwise,
The system is activated. there is the danger of an accident.◀
Reference
119
Driving comfort Check the traffic situation as well ▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. 6 mph/
10 km/h.
Loud sounds outside and within the vehi‐
cle can drown out the signal tones of the parking ▷ On snow-covered or slippery road surfaces
assistant and PDC. if necessary.
Check the traffic situation around the vehicle ▷ If doors are open.
with your own eyes; otherwise, there is the dan‐ A message appears on the Control Display.
ger of an accident.◀
1. Switch on the parking assistant and activate Continuing
it if necessary. An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐
The status of the parking space search is in‐ tinued if necessary.
dicated on the Control Display. Follow the instructions on the Control Display to
2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐ do this.
play.
Switching off
The end of the parking procedure is indi‐
cated on the Control Display. The system can be deactivated as follows:
3. Adjust the parking position yourself if nec‐ ▷ Press the button.

essary.
▷ Switch off the ignition.
Notes
Malfunction
▷ The parking assistant takes control of steer‐
ing for as long as the symbol for active park‐ A Check Control message, refer to page 79, is
ing appears on the display. displayed.
▷ The system maneuvers the vehicle to posi‐ The parking assistant failed. Have the system
tion it properly in smaller parking spaces, for checked.
example.
System limits
▷ To achieve the best possible parking posi‐
tion, wait for the automatic steering wheel Changes to the parking space
movement after the gear change when the Changes to the parking space after it was
vehicle is stationary. measured are not taken into account by the sys‐
▷ When parking in parking spaces on the driv‐ tem.
er's side, the corresponding turn signal must Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐
be set. vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci‐
dent occurring.◀
Interrupting manually Transporting loads
The parking assistant can be interrupted at any Loads that extend beyond the perimeter
time by: of the vehicle are not taken into account by the
▷ Grasping the steering wheel and steering system during the parking procedure.
yourself. Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐
▷ "Deactivate Parking Assistant" Select vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci‐
the symbol on the Control Display. dent occurring.◀
Interrupting automatically No parking assistance

The procedure is interrupted automatically: The parking assistant does not offer assistance
in the following situations:
120
▷ In tight curves. An infrared camera records the area in front of
At a glance
the vehicle and displays the image on the Con‐
Functional limitations trol Display.
The system may not be fully functional in the The picture is a heat image. The system has an
following situations: integrated pedestrian detection function that
▷ When sensors are dirty or iced over. detects pedestrians and cyclists. Warm objects
that are similar in shape to human beings are
detected by the system.
Controls
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads. Personal responsibility
Night Vision cannot replace the driver's
Limits of ultrasonic measurement personal judgment of the visibility conditions
The detection of objects can reach the physical and the traffic situation. The view ahead and the
limits of ultrasonic measurement, for instance: actual visibility conditions must always be the
Driving tips
basis on which the vehicle speed is adjusted;
▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches.
otherwise, there is a risk to road safety.◀
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as Heat image
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
Navigation
Ultrasound sensors
The image shows the heat radiated by objects
in the field of view of the camera.
Warm objects have a light appearance and cold
objects, a dark appearance.
The ultrasounds sensors used to measure park‐ The ability to detect an object depends on the
ing spaces are located in the side turn signals. temperature difference between the object and
To ensure full operability: the background and on the level of heat radiation
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. emitted by the object. Objects that are similar in
temperature to the environment or that radiate
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not very little heat are difficult to detect.
spray the sensors for long periods and main‐
tain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Mobility
Night Vision with pedestrian

detection*
The concept
Night Vision with pedestrian detection is a night
Reference
vision system.
121
Pedestrian detection
Driving comfort ▷ Expanded area 2 to the right and left.
The entire area moves along with the vehicle in
the direction of the steering angle and changes
with the vehicle speed. As the vehicle speed in‐
creases, the area becomes longer and wider, for
example.
This symbol is displayed when a person

is detected in the central area, arrow 1,
immediately in front of the vehicle.
This symbol is displayed when a person

Warm objects that are similar in shape to human
detected in the extended area, arrow 2,
beings are detected by the system.
is moving from the right or left to the
People detected by the system are displayed central area.
with a slight yellow hue.
The symbols in the Head-up Display* corre‐
Under good ambient conditions, the pedestrian spond to the symbols in the Control Display. For
detection system operates within a range of ap‐ people located in the central area, the distance
prox. 50 ft/15 m to approx. 330 ft/100 m. to the person is indicated by the size of the sym‐
bol.
Warning of people in danger
Although both the shape and the heat radiation
are analyzed, false warnings cannot be ruled out.
System limits
Animals are not detected by the pedestrian de‐
tection function, even if they are clearly visible in
the image.
System operation is limited in situations such as
the following:
▷ On steep hills, in steep depressions or in
If the system detects a person in a defined area
tight curves.
in front of the vehicle and if a collision with this
person is imminent, a warning symbol appears ▷ When the camera is dirty or the protective
in the Control Display and Head-up Display*. glass is damaged.
▷ At very high external temperatures.
Pedestrian detection
Limited pedestrian detection:
▷ When people are fully or partially covered,
especially when their heads are covered.
▷ When people are not in an upright position,
e.g., when lying down.
The warning area in front of the vehicle is divided ▷ Cyclists on unconventional bicycles (e.g.,
into two areas. recumbent bicycles).
▷ Central area 1 directly in front of the vehicle.
122
▷ After physical damage to the system, e.g., Pedestrian detection
At a glance
after an accident.
Activation/deactivation
Controls
Environmental influences can limit the availabil‐
ity of pedestrian detection. If pedestrian detec‐
tion is not available, a symbol is displayed in the
Driving tips
Press the button. heat image.
This symbol disappears when the function be‐
comes available again.
Display
The pedestrian detection and warning system
only operates in darkness and only when a heat
Heat image
image is displayed.
Navigation
Adjustments via the iDrive
With Night Vision switched on:
1. Activate Night Vision with pedestrian detec‐

tion.
3. Open the desired menu item.
For safety reasons, when driving at speeds ▷ 1: "Brightness"

above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and in low ambient ▷ 2: "Contrast"
light, the image is only displayed when the low ▷ 3: "Pedestrian detection"
beams are switched on.
A still image is displayed at regular intervals for
a fraction of a second.
Night Vision with pedestrian detection is not
available on the rear screen.
Mobility

currently in use.
Reference
123
Camera
Driving comfort ▷ Wet roads.
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
If the image is distorted, check the basic set‐
tings.
Switching on/off
Rain, dirt, snow, or ice can impair camera oper‐

ation.
The camera is automatically heated when the
external temperatures are low.
The camera is automatically cleaned together
with the headlamps. Press the button.
Clean the lens, refer to page 251.
Display
Head-up Display*
The concept
1 Lane departure warning*

2 Active Cruise Control*
3 Desired speed
This system projects important information into 4 Navigation system*
the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed.
5 Speed
In this way, the driver can get information with‐
The collision warning* or Check Control mes‐
out averting his or her eyes from the road.
sages are displayed briefly if needed.
Display visibility Selecting displays in the Head-up

The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis‐ Display
play is influenced by: 1. "Settings"
▷ Certain sitting positions. 2. "Head-up display"
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐ 3. "Displayed information"
play.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
124
4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up A film in the windshield prevents double images
At a glance
Display. from being displayed.
Therefore, have the special windshield replaced
by a service center only.
Controls
currently in use.
Driving tips
Setting the brightness
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient light.
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
1. "Settings"
Navigation
2. "Head-up display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller.
The brightness is adjusted.
When the low beams are switched on, the basic
setting can be made using the instrument light‐
ing, refer to page 84.
rently in use.
Adjusting the height

1. "Settings"
2. "Head-up display"
3. "Height"
4. Turn the controller.
The height is adjusted.
rently in use.
Mobility
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
The shape of the windshield makes it possible
to display a precise image.
Reference
125
Climate control
Climate control
Automatic climate control*
1 Air distribution, left side 11 Air distribution, right side

2 Temperature, left side 12 Seat heating*, right side 48
3 AUTO program, left side 13 Active seat ventilation*, right side 49
4 Air volume, AUTO intensity, residual heat, 14 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐
left side lated-air mode
5 Remove ice and condensation 15 Cooling function
6 Maximum cooling 16 Rear window defroster
7 Display 17 ALL program
8 Air volume, AUTO intensity, right side 18 Active seat ventilation*, left side 49
9 AUTO program, right side 19 Seat heating*, left side 48
10 Temperature, right side
Climate control functions in detail ▷ Footwell.

▷ Windows and footwell: driver's side only.
Manual air distribution
▷ Windows, upper body region and footwell:
Press the button repeatedly to select a driver's side only.
program:
If the windows are fogged over, press the AUTO
▷ Upper body region. button on the driver's side to utilize the conden‐
▷ Upper body region and footwell. sation sensor.
126
Temperature The selected air volume is shown on the display
At a glance
Turn the wheel to set the desired of the automatic climate control.
temperature.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Press the button.
The automatic climate control achieves this Ice and condensation are quickly re‐
temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary moved from the windshield and the front side
Controls
with the maximum cooling or heating capacity, windows.
and then keeps it constant.
The air volume can be adjusted when the pro‐
Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐ gram is active.
perature settings. The automatic climate control
will not have sufficient time to adjust the set Maximum cooling
Driving tips
temperature.
Press the button.
AUTO program The system is set to the lowest tem‐
perature, maximum air volume and recirculated-
Press the button.
air mode.
Air volume, air distribution, and tempera‐
ture are controlled automatically. Air flows out of the vents for the upper body re‐
gion. Open them for this purpose.
Navigation
Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO
Air is cooled as quickly as possible:
intensity, and outside influences, the air is di‐
rected to the windshield, side windows, upper ▷ At an external temperature of approx. 32 ℉/
body, and into the footwell. 0 ℃.
The cooling function, refer to page 128, is ▷ When the engine is running.
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐ The air volume can be adjusted when the pro‐
gram. gram is active.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
trols the program so as to prevent window con‐ Automatic recirculated-air control/
densation as much as possible. recirculated-air mode
You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
Intensity of the AUTO program tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
With the AUTO program switched on, automatic rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
control of the air volume and air distribution can system then recirculates the air currently within
be adjusted. the vehicle.
Press the left or right side of the button: Press the button repeatedly to select
decrease or increase the intensity. an operating mode:
The selected intensity is shown on the display ▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
of the automatic climate control. ▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air con‐
Mobility
trol: a sensor detects pollutants in the out‐

Air volume, manual side air and controls the shut-off automati‐
To be able to manually adjust the air volume, cally.
switch off the AUTO program first. ▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐
Press the left or right side of the button:
manently blocked.
Reference
decrease or increase air volume.
127
Climate control If the windows are fogged over, switch off Functional requirement
the recirculated-air mode and press the ▷ Up to 20 minutes after the engine has been
AUTO button on the driver's side to utilize switched off.
the condensation sensor. Make sure that air
▷ Warm engine.
can flow onto the windshield.
▷ The battery is sufficiently charged.
Continuous recirculated-air mode
▷ External temperature below 77 ℉/25 ℃.
The recirculated-air mode should not be
used for an extended period of time, as the air
Switching on
quality inside the vehicle deteriorates steadily.◀
Cooling function
2. Press the right side of the button on
The passenger compartment can only be
the driver's side.
cooled with the engine running.
is shown on the display of the automatic cli‐
Press the button. mate control.
The air is cooled and dehumidified and The interior temperature, air volume and air dis‐
– depending on the temperature setting – tribution can be adjusted with the ignition
warmed again. switched on.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog up briefly when the engine is started. Switching off
The cooling function is switched on automati‐ At the lowest fan speed, press the left side of the
cally with the AUTO program. button on the driver's side.
When using the automatic climate control, con‐ on the display of the automatic climate control
densation water, refer to page 146, develops goes out.
that exits underneath the vehicle.
Switching the system on/off
Rear window defroster
Switching off
Press the button.
▷ Complete system:
The rear window defroster switches off
automatically after a certain period of time. At the lowest fan speed, press the
left side of the button on the driver's
side.
All program
▷ On the front passenger side:
Press the button.
At the lowest fan speed, press the
The current settings on the driver's side
left side of the button on the front
for temperature, air volume, air distribution, and
passenger side.
AUTO program are transferred to the front pas‐
senger side and to the left and right rear*.
Switching on
The program is switched off if the settings on
Press any button.
the front passenger side and in the rear* are
changed.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from
Residual heat
the incoming air.
The heat stored in the engine is used to heat the
interior.
128
The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseous Adjusting the ventilation
At a glance
pollutants from the outside air that enters the ▷ Ventilation for cooling:
vehicle.
Adjust the vent to direct the air in your di‐
This combined filter should be replaced during rection, e.g., if the vehicle interior is hot from
scheduled maintenance of your vehicle. the sun.
More information can be found in the service re‐ ▷ Draft-free ventilation:
quirements display, refer to page 78.
Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.
Controls
Ventilation in rear, center
Ventilation
Front ventilation
Driving tips
▷ Thumb wheels* for adjusting the tempera‐
Navigation
ture, arrows 1.
▷ Thumb wheels* for adjusting the tempera‐ Toward blue: colder.

ture, arrows 1. Toward red: warmer.
Toward blue: colder. ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
row 2.
Toward red: warmer.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐ ▷ Thumb wheels for opening and closing the
row 2. vents continuously, arrows 3.
▷ Thumb wheels for opening and closing the

Lateral ventilation*
vents continuously, arrows 3.
Ventilation levels*
▷ Draft-free ventilation:
Thumb wheel, arrow 3, in level : the air
current is fanned out.
▷ Maximum air volume:
Thumb wheel, arrow 3, in level : the air
is partially fanned out and partially bundled.
This maximizes the air supply. ▷ Thumb wheel for opening and closing the
Mobility
▷ Direct ventilation: vents continuously, arrow 1.

Thumb wheel, arrow 3, in level : the air is ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
bundled and can be directed to a specific row 2.
point.
Reference
129
Rear automatic climate Intensity of the AUTO program
Climate control
control* With the AUTO program switched on, automatic
control of the air volume and air distribution can
At a glance be adjusted.
Press the left or right side of the button:

decrease or increase the intensity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display

of the automatic climate control.
Temperature
Turn the wheel to set the desired
temperature.
1 Temperature
2 AUTO program
3 Vent settings The automatic climate control achieves this
4 Air volume, AUTO intensity temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary
with the maximum cooling or heating capacity,
5 Display
and then keeps it constant.
6 Maximum cooling
Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐
7 Seat heating* 49 perature settings. The automatic climate control
will not have sufficient time to adjust the set
Switching the rear automatic climate temperature.
control on/off
1. "Settings" Manual air distribution
2. "Climate" The air distribution can be adjusted to individual
3. "Rear climate control" needs.
The rear automatic climate control is not opera‐ Press the button repeatedly to select a
tional if the automatic climate control is program:
switched off or if the function for defrosting or
▷ Upper body region.
defogging the windows is active.
▷ Upper body region and footwell.
AUTO program ▷ Footwell.
Press the button.
Air volume, manual
Air volume, air distribution, and tempera‐
ture are controlled automatically: To be able to manually adjust the air volume,
switch off the AUTO program first.
Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO
intensity, and outside influences, the air is di‐ Press the left or right side of the button:
rected to the upper body and into the footwell. decrease or increase air volume.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐ The selected air volume is shown on the display
cally with the AUTO program. of the automatic climate control.
130
Switching the system on/off 3. "Activate parked-car vent."
At a glance
Switching off
At the lowest fan speed, press the left
side of the button on the driver's side.
Switching on
Press any button.
Controls
Maximum cooling
Press the button. The system is switched on. The symbol
on the automatic climate control flashes.
The system is set to the lowest tem‐
perature, maximum air volume and recirculated- The system continues to run for some time after
Driving tips
air mode. being switched off.
Air flows out of the vents for the upper body re‐ Preselecting the switch-on time
gion. Open them for this purpose.
1. "Settings"
Air is cooled as quickly as possible:
2. "Climate"
▷ At an external temperature of approx. 32 ℉/
3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
0 ℃.
Navigation
4. Enter the desired time.
▷ When the engine is running.
5. Press the controller to adopt the setting.
Parked-car ventilation Activating the switch-on time

1. "Settings"
The concept 2. "Climate"
The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehicle 3. "Activate Timer 1" or "Activate Timer 2"
interior and lowers its temperature, if necessary.
The activation time is activated. The
The system can be switched on and off directly symbol on the automatic climate control lights
or by using two preset switch-on times. It re‐ up.
mains switched on for 30 minutes.
The symbol on the automatic climate control
They can be operated via iDrive. flashes when the system has been switched on.
The system will only be switched on within the
Parked-car ventilation next 24 hours. After that, it needs to reactivated.
Using the preset switch-on time or when oper‐
ated directly: any external temperature.
Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Switching on/off directly

Mobility
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
Reference
131
Interior equipment
Interior equipment
Integrated universal remote Programming

control*
The concept
This system can replace up to three different
hand-held transmitters for various types of re‐
mote-controlled equipment, such as garage
doors or lighting systems.
The hand-held transmitter signal can be pro‐
grammed on one of the three memory buttons.
▷ LED, arrow 1.
The corresponding device can then be operated
using the programmed memory button. ▷ Memory buttons, arrow 2.
The LED indicates that a signal is being trans‐
mitted.
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters
When selling the vehicle, delete the stored pro‐
grams for security reasons. 2. Initial setup:
Press both outer buttons 1 and 3 for approx.
During programming
20 seconds until the LED flashes.
During programming and before activat‐
All programs of the three memory buttons,
ing a device using the universal remote control,
arrow 2, are cleared.
ensure that there are no people, animals, or ob‐
jects in the range of movement of the remote- 3. Hold the hand-held transmitter at a distance
controlled device; otherwise, there is a risk of of approx. 2 to 8 in/5 to 20 cm from the mem‐
injury or damage. ory buttons.
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand- 4. Simultaneously press the transmit button of
held transmitter.◀ the hand-held transmitter and the memory
button of the universal remote control.
Compatibility The LED flashes slowly.
If this symbol is printed on the packaging 5. Release both buttons when the LED flashes
or in the instructions of the hand-held rapidly.
transmitter, the remote-controlled de‐ If the LED does not flash rapidly after approx.
vice is generally compatible with the universal 15 seconds, change the distance and repeat
remote control. the step.
If you have any questions, please contact: The device can be operated using the memory
▷ Your service center. button with the engine running or the ignition
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet. switched on.
Malfunction
If the device cannot be used after repeated at‐
tempts at programming, please check whether
the hand-held transmitter is equipped with an
alternating code system.
132
To do so: 5. Press the button on the receiver of the de‐
At a glance
▷ Read the instructions of the hand-held vice to be set. You have approx. 30 seconds
transmitter. for the next step.
▷ Press the memory button of the universal 6. Press the programmed memory button of
remote control for an extended period. the universal remote control three times.
If the LED flashes rapidly for a brief period and The device can be operated when the engine is
then lights up continuously for approx. 2 sec‐ running or the ignition is switched on.
onds, the hand-held transmitter is equipped
Controls
with an alternating code system. Reassigning individual programs
In this case, program the memory buttons as 1. Switch on the ignition.
described under Alternating-code hand-held 2. Hold the hand-held transmitter at a distance
transmitters. of approx. 2 to 8 in/5 to 20 cm from the mem‐
ory buttons.
Driving tips
Alternating-code hand-held 3. Press the memory button of the universal
transmitters remote control.
Please obtain information on synchronizing the 4. If the LED flashes slowly after approx.
device in the operating manual of the device be‐ 20 seconds, press the transmit button on
ing set up. the hand-held transmitter.
Programming will be easier with the aid of a sec‐ 5. Release both buttons when the LED flashes
Navigation
ond person. rapidly.
1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote- If the LED does not flash rapidly after approx.
controlled device. 15 seconds, change the distance and repeat
2. Program the universal remote control as de‐ the step.
scribed above under Fixed-code hand-held
transmitters. Deleting all stored programs
3. Press and hold the programmed button on Press the left and right memory buttons for ap‐
the interior rearview mirror for approx. 5 sec‐ prox. 20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly.
onds until the device to be adjusted is acti‐ All stored programs are deleted.
vated. The programs cannot be deleted individually.
If the device does not become activated,
press and hold the button and watch the
LED:
▷ If the LED lights up continuously, the
programming is completed. The device
should become activated when the but‐
ton is pressed briefly.
▷ If the LED flashes for approx. 2 seconds
and then lights up continuously, con‐
Mobility
tinue the programming procedure be‐

ginning with step 4.
4. Locate the button on the receiver of the de‐
vice to be set, e.g., on the drive.
Reference
133
Ashtray/cigarette lighter* Front: Automatic transmission/Sports
Interior equipment
automatic transmission*
Front: manual transmission
Opening
Opening
Press on the cover.

Press on the cover.
Emptying
Emptying Take out the insert.
Take out the insert.
Lighter
Lighter
Push in the lighter.
The lighter can be removed as
soon as it pops back out.
Danger of burns
Only hold the hot lighter by its head; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
Press on the cover.
Switch off the ignition and take the remote con‐
trol with you when leaving the vehicle so that Push in the lighter.
children cannot use the lighter and burn them‐ The lighter can be removed as
selves.◀ soon as it pops back out.
Danger of burns
Switch off the ignition and take the remote con‐
trol with you when leaving the vehicle so that
children cannot use the lighter and burn them‐
selves.◀
134
Rear Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable
At a glance
connectors.
Opening
Front center console: manual
transmission
Controls
Press on the cover.
Driving tips
Emptying Press on the cover.
Take out the insert. Remove the cover or cigarette lighter*.
Lighter Front center console: Automatic

transmission/Sports automatic
transmission*
Navigation
Push in the lighter.
Danger of burns
Press on the cover.
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter*.
Take the remote control with you when leaving
Center armrest
the vehicle so that children cannot use the
lighter and burn themselves.◀
The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops
back out.
Mobility
Connecting electrical devices

Sockets
The lighter socket can be used for electrical de‐
vices up to approx. 200 watts with 12 volts with Remove the cover.
the engine running or the ignition switched on.
Reference
135
Rear center console
Interior equipment 2. Insert the latch plate at the end of the belt
into the specially designated fixture on the
rear window shelf.
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter*.
In the trunk* 3. Push the corresponding head restraint

down as far as it will go.
To access the socket: fold open the cover.
4. Pull the corresponding lever in the trunk to
release the rear seat backrest.
Through-loading system*
General information
The trunk can be enlarged by folding down the
rear seat backrest.
The rear seat backrest is divided into two parts
at a ratio of 60 to 40. The sides can be folded
down separately or together.
Opening 5. The unlocked rear seat backrest moves for‐

ward slightly. Fold the backrest forward by
Move the front seats to an upright position
the head restraint.
Before folding down the rear backrests,
ensure that the front seats are moved forward
slightly and are in an upright position. Other‐
wise, the head restraint and screen could be
damaged.◀
1. Unlock the belt lock of the center safety belt
in the rear using the latch plate of another
safety belt.
Closing
1. Return the rear seat backrest to the upright
seating position and engage it.
Ensure that the lock is securely en‐

gaged
When folding back the backrest, be sure that
it locks in place securely. If it is not properly
136
engaged, transported cargo could enter the 5. Insert the tongue plate into the belt buckle.
At a glance
passenger compartment during braking or
evasive maneuvers and endanger the vehi‐
cle occupants.◀
2. Release the latch plate from the fixture on
the rear window shelf and insert it into the
belt lock of the center safety belt. Make sure
you hear the latch plate engage.
Controls
To secure cargo, refer to page 147, with nets or
draw straps, the trunk is fitted with lashing eyes.
6. Tighten the retaining strap.
Ski bag*
Driving tips
Capacity
The ski bag is designed for transporting four
pairs of skis up to 2.10 m in length or, depending
on the binding, up to two snowboards with a
length of up to 1.60 m.
Navigation
Preparing and loading the ski bag
Securing the ski bag
1. Fold open the center armrest on the inside.
Secure the ski bag by tightening the re‐
2. Open the inside cover and trunk by pressing
taining strap; otherwise, the contents could
the button.
present a source of danger to the passengers,
for example during braking or evasive maneu‐
vers.◀
Removing the ski bag

The ski bag can be removed entirely, e.g., to dry
quickly or to use other inserts.
3. Lay out the ski bag.

4. Load the ski bag. If necessary, wrap the
sharp edges of the skis.
If necessary, open the ski bag zipper to ease
loading or to dry the ski bag.
Mobility
1. Pull the handle forward and lift the ski bag

out.
2. Close the cover in the trunk.
More information on the various inserts available
can be obtained from your service center.
Reference
137
Storage compartments
Storage compartments Closing

Fold up the cover.
The following storage compartments are avail‐
able in the vehicle interior:
USB interface for data transfer
▷ Glove compartment on the driver's and front
passenger side, refer to page 138.
▷ Storage compartment on the center con‐
sole: manual transmission.
▷ Storage compartment*, refer to page 141,
in the center console for the remote control:
Automatic transmission/Sports automatic
transmission*
▷ Storage compartment in the center armrest,
refer to page 139, in the front and rear. Connection for importing and exporting data on
▷ Compartments in the doors. USB devices, e.g.:
▷ Pockets* on the backrests of the front seats. ▷ Personal Profile settings, refer to page 33.
▷ Net* in the front passenger footwell. ▷ Music collection, refer to page 185.
Observe the following when connecting:
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
Glove compartment nector into the USB interface.
Front passenger side ▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or

lamps to the USB interface.
Opening ▷ Do not connect USB hard drives.
▷ Do not use the USB interface to recharge
external devices.
Driver's side
Opening
Pull the handle.

The light in the glove compartment switches on.
Close the glove compartment again im‐

mediately
Close the glove compartment immediately after
use while driving; otherwise, injury may occur Pull the handle.
during accidents.◀
Close the glove compartment again im‐
mediately
138
Close the glove compartment immediately after Connection for an external audio
At a glance
use while driving; otherwise, injury may occur device
during accidents.◀
Closing
Fold up the cover.
Controls
Center armrest
Front
A storage compartment is located in the center This can be used to connect an external audio
armrest between the front seats. device, such as a CD or MP3 player.
Driving tips
Opening ▷ AUX-IN port, refer to page 190.
▷ USB audio interface*, refer to page 191.
Rear
The center armrest contains a storage compart‐
ment.
Navigation
Folding down
Press the button.
Locking the storage compartment
Pull on the opener and fold the armrest forward.
Opening
The storage compartment in the armrest can be

locked with a key to separately secure the trunk
lid, refer to page 40, for example.
Mobility
After the storage compartment is locked, the re‐

mote control can be handed out without the in‐
tegrated key, refer to page 32, for instance at a
hotel.
Pull on the handle and fold open the cover.
This prevents access to the storage compart‐
Reference
ment and to the trunk.
139
Cupholders
Notes
Shatter-proof containers and no hot
drinks
Use light and shatter-proof containers and do
not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is the
increased danger of injury in an accident.◀
Unsuitable containers Before closing the center armrest, fold the cu‐
Do not forcefully push unsuitable contain‐ pholder back up. Push the lever in the direction
ers into the cupholders. This may result in dam‐ of the arrow to do this.
age.◀
Front: Automatic transmission/Sports
Front: manual transmission automatic transmission*
On the center console
To open: press on the cover.
To open: press the button.

Rear
The insert folds out.
In the front center armrest.
To use as a storage compartment, fold the insert
back in.
In the center armrest
The cupholder can be adjusted for three differ‐

ent container sizes.
To open: press the button.
To reduce in size: fold closed to the desired po‐
Fold the cupholder down.
sition.
To close: fold all the way closed. The cupholder
must be closed before it can be opened fully.
140
Remote control storage Trunk
At a glance
compartment*
Net*
Opening Smaller objects can be stored in the net on the
side of the trunk.
To transport larger objects, it can be pushed
down.
Controls
Storage compartment* under the floor
panel
Driving tips
Press on the cover.
Remote control storage compartment
Navigation
Raise the floor panel.
Storage compartment on the side*

A storage compartment is located at the side of
the trunk.
Storage is possible in a vertical position in the Lashing eyes
center armrest.
Clothes hooks
The clothes hooks are located next to the grab
handles in the rear and on the door pillar in the
rear.
Do not obstruct view

When suspending clothing from the To secure cargo, refer to page 147, with nets or
hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driver's draw straps, the trunk is fitted with lashing eyes.
vision.◀
Mobility
No heavy objects
Do not hang heavy objects from the hooks;
otherwise, they may present a danger to pas‐
sengers during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers.◀
Reference
141
142
Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information useful
in dealing with specific driving and operating
modes.
143
Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving
Breaking-in period above have to be renewed in the course of the

vehicle's operating life.
General information
Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to
each other. General driving notes
The following instructions will help achieve a
Closing the trunk lid
long vehicle life and good economy.
Drive with the trunk lid closed
Engine and differential Only operate the vehicle with the trunk lid
Always obey the official speed limit. closed; otherwise, exhaust fumes could enter
the passenger compartment.◀
Up to approx. 1,200 miles/2,000 km If the vehicle must be driven with the trunk lid
Drive at varying engine and road speeds but do open:
not exceed: 1. Close all windows and the glass sunroof*.
▷ In gasoline engines, 4,500 rpm or 100 mph/ 2. Greatly increase the air volume of the auto‐
160 km/h. matic climate control system.
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
transmission's kickdown mode for the initial Hot exhaust system
miles. Hot exhaust system
High temperatures are generated in the
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km exhaust system.
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
Do not remove the heat shields installed and
increased.
never apply undercoating to them. When driv‐
ing, standing at idle and while parking, take care
Tires to avoid possible contact between the hot ex‐
Due to technical factors associated with their haust system and any highly flammable materi‐
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac‐ als such as hay, leaves, grass, etc. Such contact
tion potential until after an initial breaking-in pe‐ could lead to a fire, and with it the risk of serious
riod. personal injury as well as property damage.
Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/ Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, there
300 km. is the danger of getting burned.◀
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐
prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake pads
and rotors. Drive conservatively during this
breaking-in period.
Following part replacement

The same breaking in procedures should be ob‐
served if any of the components mentioned
144
Climate control windshield When driving on wet or slushy roads, reduce
At a glance
your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀
Driving through water

Drive though calm water only if it is not deeper
than 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this height, no
faster than walking speed, up to 6 mph/10 km/h.
Adhere to water depth and speed limita‐
Controls
tions
Do not exceed this water depth and walking
The marked area is not covered with a heat-re‐ speed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the elec‐
flective coating. trical systems and the transmission may be
Use this area for garage door openers, devices damaged.◀
Driving tips
for electronic toll collection, etc.
Braking safely
Climate control laminated tinted safety Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard
glass feature.
The vehicle glass provides full protection Applying the brakes fully is the most effective
against the harmful effects of UV radiation on the way of braking in situations when this is neces‐
Navigation
skin. sary.
The vehicle maintains steering responsiveness.
Mobile communication devices in the You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum
vehicle of steering effort.
Mobile communication devices in the ve‐ Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
hicle the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
It is advised that you do not use mobile commu‐ active mode.
nication devices, e.g., mobile phones, inside the
vehicle without connecting them directly to the Driving in wet conditions
external antenna. Otherwise, the vehicle elec‐ When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, briefly
tronics and mobile communication devices can exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every
interfere with each other. In addition, there is no few miles.
assurance that the radiation generated during
Ensure that this action does not endanger other
transmission will be discharged from the vehicle
road users.
interior.◀
The heat generated in this process helps dry the
Hydroplaning brake discs and pads.
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can In this way braking efficiency will be available
form between the tires and road surface. when you need it.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
Hills
Mobility
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete

loss of contact between the tires and the road Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to in which the least braking is required. Otherwise,
steer and brake the vehicle. the brake system may overheat, resulting in a
reduction in the brake system efficiency.
Hydroplaning
Manual transmission:
Reference
145
Loading
Things to remember when driving You can increase the engine's braking effect by
shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if
necessary. Overloading the vehicle
Automatic transmission/Sports automatic To avoid exceeding the approved carrying
transmission*: capacity of the tires, never overload the vehicle.
You can increase the engine's braking effect by Overloading can lead to overheating and in‐
shifting down in the manual mode of the auto‐ creases the rate at which damage develops in‐
matic transmission, refer to page 66. side the tires. This could result in a sudden loss
of tire inflation pressure.◀
Avoid load on the brakes
No fluids in the trunk
Avoid placing excessive load on the brake
Make sure that fluids do not leak into the
system. Light but consistent brake pressure can
trunk; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam‐
lead to high temperatures, brake wear and pos‐
aged.◀
sibly even brake failure.◀
Do not drive in neutral Determining the load limit
Do not drive in neutral or with the engine
stopped, as doing so disables engine braking. In
addition, steering and brake assist is unavailable
with the engine stopped.◀
No objects in the area around the pedals
Never allow floor mats, carpets or any
other objects to protrude into the area of pedal
movement and impair pedal operation.◀
Brake disc corrosion 1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐

Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination hicle’s placard*:
on the brake pads are furthered by: ▷ The combined weight of occupants and
▷ Low mileage. cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the ve‐
used at all. hicle and unstable driving situations may
result.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure
driver and passengers that will be riding in
that must be exerted by the pads during brake
your vehicle.
applications to clean the discs is not reached.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the
and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef‐
pounds.
fect that generally cannot be corrected.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
Condensation under the parked vehicle amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
When using the automatic climate control, con‐ For example, if the YYY amount equals
densation water develops that exits underneath 1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs pas‐
the vehicle. sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail‐
able cargo and luggage load capacity is
Therefore, traces of condensed water under the
650 lbs: 1,400 lbs minus 750 lbs = 650 lbs.
vehicle are normal.
146
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage Securing cargo
At a glance
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transfered to your
vehicle. Consult the manual for transporting
Controls
a trailer to determine how this may reduce
the available cargo and luggage load ca‐
pacity of your vehicle.
▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐
taining straps, a trunk net* or draw straps.
Load
▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with cargo
Driving tips
straps*.
Cargo straps can be attached to four lashing
eyes located in the trunk.
Securing cargo
Always position and secure the cargo as
described above; otherwise, it can endanger the
Navigation
car's occupants if sudden braking or swerving
becomes necessary.
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of Heavy or hard objects should not be carried
the occupants and the cargo. loose inside the car; otherwise, they could be
The greater the weight of the occupants, the thrown around as a result of hard braking, sud‐
less cargo that can be transported. den swerves, etc., and endanger the occu‐
pants.◀
Stowing cargo
Roof-mounted luggage rack
Special rack system as optional
accessory
A special rack system is available as an optional
accessory.
Follow the directions given in the installation in‐
structions.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward and as low

as possible, ideally directly behind the trunk
Mobility
separating wall.
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners.
Reference
147
Anchorage points
Things to remember when driving The implementation of certain measures, driv‐
ing style and regular maintenance, refer to
page 235, can have an influence on fuel con‐
sumption and on the environmental impact.
Remove unnecessary cargo

Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove attached parts following use

Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggage
Fold the cover outward. racks which are no longer required following
use.
Mounting Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐

dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained
for raising and opening the glass sunroof*.
Close the windows and glass sunroof*
Loading Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
open results in increased air resistance and
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of
raises fuel consumption.
gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on
vehicle handling and steering response.
Check the tire inflation pressure
Therefore, note the following when loading and regularly
driving:
Check and, if necessary, correct the tire inflation
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly. pressure, refer to page 224, at least twice a
▷ The roof load should not be too large in area. month and before starting on a long trip.
▷ Always load the heaviest pieces on the bot‐ Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
tom. sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
▷ Fasten roof-mounted cargo correctly and tire wear.
securely.
Drive away without delay
▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the trunk lid. Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
▷ Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration away, but at moderate engine speeds.
and braking maneuvers. Take corners gen‐
tly. This is the fastest way for the cold engine to
reach its operating temperature.
Look well ahead when driving

Saving fuel
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
General information By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle
Your vehicle contains advanced technology for driving ahead of you.
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐ Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces
sions. fuel consumption.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors.
148
Avoid high engine speeds Please also note the BMW Maintenance Sys‐
At a glance
Use 1st gear to get the vehicle in motion. Be‐ tem, refer to page 235.
ginning with 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. When
accelerating, shift up before reaching high en‐
gine speeds.
When you reach the desired speed, shift into the
highest applicable gear and drive with the en‐
gine speed as low as possible and at a constant
Controls
speed.
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers
fuel consumption and reduces wear.
The gear shift indicator*, refer to page 76, of
your vehicle indicates the most fuel efficient
Driving tips
gear.
Use coasting conditions

When approaching a red light, take your foot off
the accelerator and coast to a halt in the highest
applicable gear.
Navigation
On a downhill slope, take your foot off the ac‐
celerator and coast in a suitable gear.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Switch off the engine during longer
stops
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,
at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic
congestion.
Fuel savings are achieved after the vehicle is
switched off for only approx. 4 seconds.
Switch off any functions that are not

currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear win‐
dow defroster require a lot of energy and con‐
sume additional fuel, especially in city and stop-
and-go traffic.
Therefore, switch off these functions if they are
not actually needed.
Mobility
Have maintenance carried out

Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve
optimal vehicle economy and operating life.
Have the maintenance carried out by your serv‐
ice center.
Reference
149
150
Navigation
This chapter contains various examples of how
the navigation system can guide you reliably to
your destination.
151
Navigation
Navigation
Navigation system 3. "Enter address"
General information
The navigation system can determine the pre‐
cise position of the vehicle, with the aid of sat‐
ellites and vehicle sensors, and can reliably
guide you to every entered destination.
Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and can
be updated.
Entries in stationary vehicle
4. Select "State/Province" or the displayed
Enter data only when the vehicle is sta‐ state/province.
tionary, and always give priority to the applicable
traffic regulations in the event of any contradic‐ Entering a town/city
tion between traffic and road conditions and the
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis‐
instructions issued by the navigation system.
played town/city.
Failure to take to this precaution can place you
in violation of the law and put vehicle occupants
and other road users in danger.◀
Destination input
Manual destination entry
General information
The system supports you in entering street 2. Select letters, if necessary.
names and house numbers by automatically The list is narrowed down further with each
completing the entry and providing entry com‐ entry.
parisons, refer to page 24.
3. Move the controller to the right.
Stored town/city and street names can be called
4. Select the town/city name from the list.
up quickly.
If there are several towns/cities with the same
▷ If the existing entries should not be changed,
name:
the entries for the state/province and town/
city can be skipped. 1. Change to the list of town/city names.
▷ Destination guidance is started to the town/ 2. Highlight the town/city.
city center if no street is entered. With the Professional navigation system: A
preview map is displayed on the split screen.
Entering a state/province
3. Select the town/city.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. "Navigation"
152
Entering the postal code 1. "Navigation"
At a glance
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis‐ 2. "Enter address"
played town/city.
3. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
4. Change to the list of street names.
3. Select the numbers.
5. "In" the displayed state/province.
4. Change to the list of postal codes and towns/
cities.
Controls
5. Highlight the postal code.
With the Professional navigation system: A
6. Select the postal code.
Driving tips
Entering a street and intersection
1. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
2. Enter a street and intersection in the same 6. Select the letters.
way as you would enter a town/city. 7. Change to the list of street names.
If there are several streets with the same name: 8. Highlight the street.
1. Change to the list of street names. With the Professional navigation system: A
Navigation
2. Highlight the street.
9. Select the street.
Starting destination guidance after
3. Select the street. entering the destination
1. "Accept destination"
Alternative: enter the street address
and house number 2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest."
1. Select "Street" or the displayed street. ▷ Adjusting "Route preference", refer to
page 160.
2. Enter the street as you would the town/city.
▷ Searching "Points of Interest at loc.", refer
3. "House number"
to page 155.
4. Select the numbers.
5. Change to the list of house numbers. Address book
6. Select a house number or range of house
numbers. Selecting a destination from the
address book
Entering a street without a destination 1. "Navigation"
town/city 2. "Address book": contacts with addresses
All streets of the selected state/province are of‐ are displayed if these have been checked as
Mobility
fered. The associated town/city is displayed af‐ destinations.

ter the street name. If the mobile phone* does not display the
The desired street does not exist in the specified contacts with addresses, they must first be
city/town because it belongs to another part of
the city/town.
Reference
153
Navigation checked as a destination, refer to 2. Open "Options".
page 212. 3. "Store position as contact" or "Add position
to contact"
3. Select a contact in the list or, if desired, with

"A-Z search". 4. Depending on the selection, choose an ex‐
4. If necessary, select "Business address" or isting contact from the list. Select the type
"Home address". of address and enter the first and last name.
5. "Store in vehicle"
Storing the destination in the address
book Editing or deleting an address
After entering the destination, store the desti‐ 1. "Navigation"
nation in the address book.
2. "Address book"
1. Open "Options". 3. Highlight the entry.
2. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing 4. Open "Options".
contact"
5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry"
Using the home address as the

destination
The home address must be stored. Specify the
home address, refer to page 211.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
3. "Home"
3. Select an existing contact, if available.
4. Select "Business address" or "Home
address".
5. Enter "Last name" and, if necessary, "First
name".
6. "Store in vehicle"
Storing the position

The current position can be stored in the ad‐
dress book. 4. Start destination guidance.
1. "Navigation"
154
Last destinations Special destinations
At a glance
At a glance Opening the search for special
The destinations previously entered are stored destinations
automatically. To select special destinations, e.g., hotels or
The destinations can be called up and used as a tourist attractions:
destination for destination guidance. 1. "Navigation"
Controls
2. "Points of Interest"
Calling up the last destination
Narrow the search for special destinations
1. "Navigation"
by specifying the location and category.
2. "Last destinations"
Position of special destinations
Driving tips
1. "Search area"
Navigation
3. Select the destination.
4. Start destination guidance.
2. Select the location where the system is to
Editing the destination search for the special destination: "At
1. "Navigation" current location", "At destination", "At a
2. "Last destinations" different destination", "Along route"
3. Highlight the destination.

Special destinations category
4. Open "Options".
1. "Category"
5. "Edit destination"
2. Select "All" or the specific category of the
special destination, e.g., hotels or restau‐
Deleting the last destinations rants.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations" Category details
3. Highlight the destination. For some special destinations, additional details
can be displayed that are available in the navi‐
4. Open "Options".
gation data, e.g., an Italian-style restaurant.
5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last
"Category details"
destinations"
Mobility
Reference
155
Navigation 4. "BMW Assist dest. entry"
Entering the special destination by its

name
1. "Navigation"
2. "Points of Interest"
3. "Name, A-Z search"
4. Select the letters.
Depending on the distance, the search may
Starting the search for special take some time. The list can contain a max‐
destinations imum of 100 entries.
1. "Start search" 5. Change to the list of special destinations.
A list of the special destinations is displayed. 6. Highlight the special destination.
▷ "At current location" With the Professional navigation system: A
The special destinations are listed ac‐ preview map is displayed on the split screen.
cording to their distance from the cur‐ 7. Select a special destination.
rent location and are displayed with a di‐
rectional arrow pointing to the 8. Select the symbol.
destination. 9. "Start guidance"
▷ "At destination", "At a different
destination" and "Along route" Displaying special destinations in the
map
Special destinations are sorted by the
distance to the search point. To display symbols of the special destinations
in the map view:
▷ Destinations of the selected category
are displayed in the map view as sym‐ 1. "Navigation"
bols. The display depends on the scale 2. "Map"
of the map and the category.
3. Open "Options".
2. Highlight the special destination.
4. "Display Points of Interest"
3. Select a special destination.
5. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest."
If a phone number is available, a connection
can be established if necessary.
Destination entry via BMW Assist*

A connection is established to the Concierge 5. Select the setting.
service, refer to page 215.
Destination via map
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address" Opening the map
3. Open "Options". 1. "Navigation"
156
2. "Map"
At a glance
The map section is displayed. The map shows
the current position of the vehicle.
Selecting the destination

"Interactive map" is started.
Controls
2. Select the destination with crosshairs.
▷ To change the scale: turn the controller. ▷ Select the symbol. Start destination
▷ To shift the map: move the controller in guidance to the location marked on the map.
the required direction. ▷ "Exit interactive map"
▷ To shift the map diagonally: move the ▷ "View in northern direction"
Driving tips
controller in the required direction and ▷ "Display destination": the map section
turn it. around the destination is displayed.
▷ "Display current location": the map section
around your current location is displayed.
▷ "Find points of interest"
Navigation
Destination entry by voice*
General information
▷ Instructions for voice activation system, re‐
fer to page 25.
3. Press the controller to display additional
▷ When entering the destination by voice, you
menu items.
can change between voice operation and
▷ Select the symbol. the iDrive.
"Start guidance" or "Add as another ▷ To have the available spoken instructions
dest." read aloud ›Voice commands‹
▷ "Exit interactive map": return to the map
view. Saying the entries
▷ "Find points of interest": the search for ▷ Example: to enter a town/city in Germany as
special destinations is started. a whole word, the language of the system
must be German.
Specifying the street ▷ The town/city, street, and house number
If the system cannot recognize a street, it dis‐ can be said as a single sentence.
plays a street name in the vicinity or the coordi‐ ▷ Countries, towns and cities, streets, and in‐
nates of the destination. tersections can be said as whole words or
spelled in the language of the system, refer
Mobility
Interactive map to page 77.

In the interactive map, the scale can be adjusted ▷ Spell the entry if the spoken language and
and the visible map section can be shifted. In the language of the system differ.
addition, pressing the controller makes further
▷ Say the letters smoothly, and avoid exag‐
functions available:
gerating the pronunciation and inserting
Reference
lengthy pauses between the letters.
157
Entering the address Starting destination guidance
Navigation
›Start guidance‹ or, if necessary, Enter new
1. Briefly press the button on the destination‹
steering wheel.
2. ›Enter address‹ Storing a destination
3. Wait for a request from the system. The destination is automatically added to the list
4. Specify the desired address in the sug‐ of last destinations.
gested form.
Planning a trip
5. Continue making the entry as prompted by
the system.
New trip
6. If necessary, individually name the separate
Additional intermediate destinations can be en‐
components of the address, e.g., the town/
tered for a trip.
city.
1. "Navigation"
Entering a town/city 2. "Map"
The town/city can either be said as a word or 3. Select the symbol.
spelled.
4. "Enter new destination"
1. ›City‹ or ›Spell city‹.
2. Wait for the system to prompt you for the
town/city.
3. Say the name of the town/city, or name at
least the first three letters.
Depending on the entry, up to 20 towns/cit‐
ies may be suggested.
4. Select the town/city.
▷ To select a recommended town/
5. Select the type of destination entry and en‐
city: ›Yes‹
ter the intermediate destination.
▷ To select a different town/city: ›New
entry‹
▷ Select an entry: ›Entry ... ‹ e.g., entry 2
▷ To spell an entry: ›Spell city‹
Entering a street or intersection

Enter a street or intersection in the same way as
you would enter a town/city.
Entering a house number

House numbers can be entered up to the num‐ Entering intermediate destinations
ber 999 999. A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations can
›House number‹ be entered for one trip.
Say each digit separately. 1. "Enter new destination"
158
2. Select the type of destination entry and en‐ ▷ "Reposition dest. in the trip": move an
At a glance
ter the intermediate destination. intermediate destination to another po‐
sition in the list.
▷ "Delete dest. in the trip"
With the Professional navigation

system: Deleting a trip
1. "Stored trips"
Controls
2. Highlight the desired trip.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete all trips" or "Delete trip"
3. Select "Add as another dest.".
4. Select the location where the intermediate
Driving tips
destination is to be inserted: "Reposition
Destination guidance
dest. in the trip"
Starting destination guidance
Starting the trip
1. "Navigation"
After all intermediate destinations have been
entered, "Start guidance". 2. Make a destination entry, refer to
page 152.
Navigation
Or select a trip that has already been stored, if
available. "Stored trips" 3. "Accept destination"
4. "Start guidance"
With the Professional navigation ▷ The route is shown on the Control Display.
system: Storing a trip
▷ The distance to the destination/intermedi‐
Up to 30 created trips can be stored in the trip ate destination and the estimated time of ar‐
list. rival are displayed in the map view.
1. Open "Options". ▷ The arrow display is shown in the instrument
2. "Store trip" panel and on the Control Display if neces‐
sary.
3. Enter the letters.
4. "OK" Terminating destination guidance
1. "Navigation"
Trip direction
2. "Map"
The trip direction is reversed: intermediate des‐
tinations are displayed in reverse order in the list. 3. Select the symbol.
4. "Stop guidance"
1. "Map"
2. "Guidance" Continuing destination guidance
3. "Options" If the destination was not reached during the last
Mobility
4. "Reverse order of trip dest." trip, destination guidance can be resumed.

"Resume guidance"
Intermediate destination options
1. "Destination in the trip"
2. Select an intermediate destination.
Reference
159
Route criteria
Navigation ▷ "Avoid toll roads": toll roads are avoided
wherever possible.
General information ▷ "Avoid ferries": ferries are avoided
▷ The route calculated can be influenced by where possible.
selecting certain criteria.
▷ The route criteria can be changed when the Dynamic destination guidance
destination is entered and during destina‐ The route is automatically changed in the event
tion guidance. of traffic obstructions.
▷ Road types are part of the navigation data ▷ The system does not point out traffic ob‐
and are taken into consideration when plan‐ structions along the original route.
ning a route, e.g., avoid highways. ▷ Traffic bulletins continue to be displayed on
▷ The recommended route may differ from the the map.
route you would take based on personal ex‐ ▷ Depending on the type of road and the na‐
perience. ture and length of the traffic obstruction, the
▷ The settings are stored for the remote con‐ route can also be calculated so that you
trol currently in use. travel through the traffic obstruction.
Changing the route criteria Activating dynamic destination guidance

1. "Navigation" 1. "Navigation"
2. "Map" 2. Open "Options".
3. "Route preference" 3. "Dynamic guidance"
4. Select the criterion:
Route
▷ "Fast route": time-optimized route, be‐
ing a combination of the shortest possi‐ Different views of the route are available during
ble route and the fastest roads. destination guidance:
▷ "Efficient route": optimized combina‐ ▷ Arrow view in the instrument cluster and on
tion of the fastest and shortest route. the Control Display.
▷ "Short route": short distance, irrespec‐ ▷ List of streets and towns/cities.
tive of how fast or slow progress will be. ▷ Map view, refer to page 162.
▷ "Alternative routes": other suggested ▷ Arrow display on the Head‐Up Display*, re‐
alternative routes. fer to page 124.
Arrow view
The following information is displayed during
destination guidance:
▷ Large arrow, current direction of travel.
▷ Small arrow, indicator of next change in di‐
rection.
▷ Intersection view.
▷ Lane information.
5. Specify additional criteria for the route, if
necessary: ▷ Traffic bulletins.
▷ "Avoid highways": highways are ▷ Distance to next change in direction.
avoided wherever possible. ▷ Street name at next change in direction.
160
Displaying a list of streets or towns/ 2. "Route information"
At a glance
cities on the route 3. "Recommended refuel"
When destination guidance is started, a list of A list of the gas stations is displayed.
the streets and towns/cities on the route is dis‐
4. Highlight a gas station.
played. The driving distances and traffic bulle‐
tins are displayed for each route section. With the Professional navigation system:
The position of the gas station is shown on
1. "Navigation" the split screen.
Controls
2. "Route information" 5. Select the gas station.
3. Highlight a section. 6. Select the symbol.
With the Professional navigation system: 7. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest."
The route section is displayed on the split
screen. Switching spoken instructions on/off
Driving tips
Bypassing a section of the route
rently in use.
Calculate a new route for a route section.
1. "Navigation"
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
2. "Route information"
3. "New route for:"
Navigation
Symbol Meaning
Spoken instructions are switched

on
Spoken instructions are switched
off
Repeating spoken instructions

1. "Navigation"
4. Turn the controller. Enter the desired num‐
2. "Map"
ber of miles.
3. Highlight the symbol.
4. Press the controller twice.
Resuming the original route
If the route section should no longer be by‐ Volume of spoken instructions
passed: Turn the volume button while giving an instruc‐
tion until the desired volume is set.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information" Saving the spoken instructions on the
programmable memory buttons
Mobility
3. "Remove blocking"
The function for switching the spoken instruc‐
Gas station recommendation tions on/off can be stored on a programmable
The remaining range is calculated and gas sta‐ memory button, refer to page 23, for quick ac‐
tions along the route are recommended. cess.
1. "Navigation"
Reference
161
Map view Automatically scaled map scale
Navigation
In the map view facing north, turn the controller
Selecting the map view in any direction until the AUTO scale is dis‐
Your location is indicated on the map. played. The map shows the entire range from
your location to the destination.
After destination guidance is started, the plan‐
ned route is displayed on the map.
Settings for the map view
The map is shown on the Control Display.
currently in use.
1. Open "Options".
1. "Navigation"
2. "Settings"
2. "Map"
Set the optimized map view.
The following functions are directly available in
the map view: ▷ "Day/night mode"
Select and create the necessary settings
Symbol Function
depending on the light conditions. When the
Starting/ending destination traffic situation/gray card is activated, this
guidance setting is not taken into account.
▷ With the Professional navigation system:
Switching spoken instructions
"Satellite images"
on/off
Depending on availability and resolution,
Changing the route criteria satellite images* are displayed at scales of
Searching for special destina‐ approx. 1 mile to 600 miles/2 km to
tions 1,000 km.
▷ With the Professional navigation system:
Displaying traffic bulletins "Perspective view in 3D"
Interactive map Displays a spatial view. Prominent areas that
are contained in the navigation data are dis‐
Map view settings
played on the map in 3D.
Changing the scale ▷ "Traffic situation/gray map"
The map is optimized for displaying traffic
Press the controller to show/suppress addi‐ bulletins. Symbols for the special destina‐
tional information on the map. tions are no longer displayed.
Changing the map section With the Professional navigation

Open the interactive map. system: Map view for split screen
▷ To shift the map: move the controller in the The map view can be selected for the split
required direction. screen independently from the main screen.
▷ To shift the map diagonally: move the con‐ 1. Open "Options".
troller in the required direction and turn it. 2. "Split screen"
The split screen is switched on.
Changing the scale
3. Tilt the controller to the right until the split
screen contents are selected.
2. To change the scale: turn the controller.
4. Select the map view.
162
▷ "Map facing north" suppliers make no representations about
At a glance
▷ "Map direction of travel" content, traffic and road conditions, route
usability, or speed.
▷ "Map view with perspective"
C. The licensed material is provided to li‐
5. To change the scale: change to the split
censee “as is,” and “where is”. Total Traffic
screen and turn the controller.
Network, including, but not limited to, any
and all third party providers of any of the li‐
censed material, expressly disclaims, to the
Traffic bulletins*
Controls
fullest extent permitted by law, all warranties
or representations with respect to the li‐
At a glance censed material (including, without limita‐
▷ Display the traffic bulletins from radio sta‐ tion, that the licensed material will be error-
tions that broadcast the TMC (Traffic Mes‐ free, will operate without interruption or that
sage Channel) of a traffic information serv‐ the traffic data will be accurate), express, im‐
Driving tips
ice. Information on traffic obstructions and plied or statutory, including, without limita‐
hazards is updated continuously. tion, the implied warranties of merchanta‐
Certain BMW models equipped with navi‐ bility, non-infringement fitness for a
gation have the capability to display real- particular purpose, or those arising from a
time traffic information. If your system has course of dealing or usage of trade.
this capability the following additional terms D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. or
Navigation
and conditions apply: BMW NA will be liable to you for any indirect,
An End-User shall no longer have the right special, consequential, exemplary, or inci‐
to use the Traffic Data in the event that the dental damages (including, without limita‐
End-User is in material breach of the terms tion, lost revenues, anticipated revenues, or
and conditions contained herein. profits relating to the same) arising from any
claim relating directly or indirectly to use of
A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear
the traffic data, and even if Total Traffic Net‐
Channel Broadcasting, Inc. (“Total Traffic
work, Inrix, Inc., or BMW NA are aware of the
Network”) holds the rights to the traffic in‐
possibility of such damages. These limita‐
cident data and RDS-TMC network through
tions apply to all claims, including, without
which it is delivered. You may not modify,
limitation, claims in contract and tort (such
copy, scan or use any other method to re‐
as negligence, product liability and strict li‐
produce, duplicate, republish, transmit or
ability). Some states do not allow the exclu‐
distribute in any way any portion of traffic in‐
sion or limitation of incidental or consequen‐
cident data. You agree to indemnify, defend
tial damages, so those particular limitations
and hold harmless BMW of North America,
may not apply to you.
LLC. (“BMW NA”) and Total Traffic Net‐
work, Inrix, Inc (and their affiliates) against ▷ The traffic information is displayed in the
any and all claims, damages, costs or other map.
expenses that arise directly or indirectly out
of (a) your unauthorized use of the traffic in‐ Switching the reception on/off
cident data or the RDS-TMC network, (b) 1. "Navigation"
Mobility
your violation of this directive and/or (c) any 2. Open "Options".

unauthorized or unlawful activities by you in
3. "Receive Traffic Info"
connection herewith.
B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is infor‐ Opening the traffic bulletins
mational only. User assumes all risk of use.
1. "Navigation"
Reference
Total Traffic Network, BMW NA, and their
163
Navigation 2. "Map" 3. Open "Options".
Move the controller to the left. 4. "Traffic Info categories"
Select the symbol. 5. Set the filter.
3. "Traffic Info"
First, the traffic bulletins on the planned
route are displayed.
The traffic bulletins are sorted in the order of
their distance from the current vehicle posi‐
tion.
4. Select a traffic bulletin.
Select the symbol to obtain additional
information.
Traffic bulletins of the selected category are dis‐
played in the map.
Traffic bulletins in the map
▷ Traffic bulletins on incidents along the route
When the traffic situation/gray card is activated,
are always displayed.
the view on the Control Display is switched over
to shades of gray. This enables a better view of ▷ For your own safety, traffic bulletins that no‐
the traffic bulletins. The day/night mode is dis‐ tify you of potentially dangerous situations,
regarded in this setting. Symbols and special such as wrong-way drivers, cannot be hid‐
destinations are not displayed. den.
1. "Navigation" Traffic bulletins during destination

2. "Map" guidance
3. Open "Options". ▷ "Dynamic guidance", refer to page 160
4. "Settings" This feature influences the behavior of the
5. "Traffic situation/gray map" system.
▷ During destination guidance, obstructions
Symbols in the map view on the route are taken into consideration.
Depending on the scale of the map and the lo‐ ▷ Dangerous situations are displayed regard‐
cation of the traffic obstruction along the route, less of the setting.
the symbols for the traffic obstructions are dis‐
played. Traffic obstructions
The system calculates the optimized route, tak‐
Additional information in the map view ing into consideration traffic obstructions and
Depending on the map scale, a traffic obstruc‐ road types.
tion's length, direction, and impact are displayed
in the map using triangles or gray bars along the Selecting a detour
calculated route. Set whether traffic obstructions should be taken
into consideration during route planning.
Filtering of traffic bulletins
1. "Navigation"
Set which traffic bulletins are to be displayed in
the map. 2. "Traffic Info"
3. Select a traffic obstruction that you wish to
1. "Navigation"
bypass.
2. "Map"
4. "Recomm. detour"
164
Taking traffic obstructions into 2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
At a glance
consideration play.
1. "Navigation" 3. Enter the authorization code of the naviga‐
2. "Traffic Info" tion DVD and change the DVD if needed.
3. First, the traffic bulletins on the planned After an interruption of the trip, follow the in‐
route are displayed. The traffic bulletins are structions on the Control Display.
sorted in the order of their distance from the
current vehicle position.
Controls
4. Select "Recomm. detour", if necessary. What to do if...
"Dynamic guidance" is activated automati‐ ▷ The current transmission position cannot be
cally. displayed?
The vehicle is located in an unrecognized
region, is in a poor reception area, or the
Driving tips
Navigation data system is currently determining the posi‐
tion. Reception is usually best when you
Information on navigation data have an unobstructed view of the sky.
1. "Navigation" ▷ The destination without street information is
2. Open "Options". not used for route guidance?
3. "Navigation system version" information is When city has been input, no downtown can
Navigation
displayed on the data version. be determined.
Input any street in the selected city and start
Updating the navigation data destination guidance.
▷ The destination is not used for route guid‐
General information ance?
Navigation data and authorization codes are The destination data is not contained in the
available from your service center. Navigation navigation data. Select a destination that is
data are stored in the vehicle and can be up‐ as close as possible to the original.
dated.
▷ Letters for destination input cannot be se‐
▷ Depending on the data volume, a data up‐ lected?
date may take several hours.
The stored data do not contain the data of
▷ Update during the trip to preserve battery. the destination.
▷ The basic navigation is available during the Select a goal that is as close as possible to
trip. the original.
▷ The status of the update can be queried in ▷ The map view is shown in shades of gray?
the options menu.
When the traffic situation/gray card is acti‐
▷ The system restarts after the update. vated, the view on the Control Display is
▷ The data carrier with the navigation data can switched over to shades of gray. This ena‐
be removed after the update is complete. bles a better view of the traffic bulletins.
Mobility
▷ Spoken instructions are no longer output

Professional navigation system: during route guidance in front of intersec‐
Perform the update tions?
1. Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD The area has not yet been fully recorded, or
player with the labeled side facing up. you have left the recommended route and
Reference
165
Navigation the system requires a few seconds to cal‐
culate a new route suggestion.
166
167
168
Entertainment
The chapter helps assure your enjoyment when
receiving radio and television stations and playing
CDs, DVDs and tracks from the music collection.
169
Tone
Tone
General information Adjusting the equalizer

1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
The sound settings are stored for the remote
control currently in use. 2. "Tone"
3. "Equalizer"
4. Select the desired setting.
Treble, bass, balance, and
fader
▷ "Balance": left/right volume distribution.
▷ "Fader": front/rear volume distribution.
Setting treble, bass, balance, and fader

2. "Tone"
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
Multi-channel playback,
surround*
Choose between stereo and multi-channel play‐
back, surround.
3. Select the desired tone settings.
Setting multi-channel playback,
surround
2. "Tone"
3. "Surround"

5. To confirm: press the controller.
Equalizer*
Multi-channel playback, surround, is simulated
Setting for individual audio frequency ranges.
when playing back an audio track in stereo.
170
Multi-channel playback is automatically acti‐
At a glance
vated or deactivated, depending on the audio
track selected.
Volume
▷ "Speed volume": speed-dependent volume
control.
Controls
▷ "PDC": volume of the PDC signal compared
to the entertainment sound output.
▷ "Gong": volume of the signal, such as the
safety belt reminder, compared to the en‐
tertainment sound output.
Driving tips
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
4. Select the desired volume setting.
Navigation
6. To store: press the controller.
Resetting the tone settings

2. "Tone"
3. "Reset"
Mobility
Reference
171
Radio
Radio
Controls Storing a station

1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Highlight the desired station.
1 Change entertainment sources

2 Change station/track
3 Programmable memory buttons
4 Volume, on/off 4. Press the controller for an extended period.
5 Change wave band 5. Select the desired memory location.
The stations are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
AM/FM station The stations can also be stored on the program‐
mable memory buttons, refer to page 23.
Selecting a station
1. "Radio" Selecting a station manually
2. "FM" or "AM" Station selection via the frequency.
3. Select the desired station. 1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. "Manual"
4. To select the frequency: turn the controller.
All saved stations are stored for the remote con‐

trol currently in use.
Changing the station via the button

Press the button. To store the station: press the controller for an
extended period.
172
RDS* In areas in which the station is not continuously
At a glance
RDS broadcasts additional information, such as received in digital mode, the playback switches
the station name, in the FM wave band. When between analog and digital reception. Due to
playing a station with multiple frequencies, the time delayed broadcasting, there may be repe‐
system automatically switches to the frequency titions or interruptions. In this case, switch off
with the best reception, if needed. digital radio reception.
Switching the RDS on/off Displaying additional information
Controls
1. "Radio" Some stations broadcast additional information
on the current track, such as the name of the ar‐
2. "FM"
tist.
3. Open "Options".
1. Select the desired station.
4. "RDS"
2. Open "Options".
Driving tips
3. "Station info"
Selecting a substation
This symbol indicates that a main station also
broadcasts additional substations. The station
name of the main station ends in HD1. Station
Navigation
names of the substations end in HD2, HD3, etc.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ 2. Press the controller.
rently in use.
3. Select the substation.
HD Radio™ reception* When reception is poor, the substation is muted
for several seconds. If reception is interrupted
Many stations broadcast both analog and digital
for an extended period, it switches back to the
signals.
main station.
License conditions
HD Radio™ technology manufactured under li‐
cense from iBiquity Digital Corp. U. S. and For‐ Weather Band*
eign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD and HD
Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiq‐ General information
uity Digital Corp.
The availability of the Weather Band and the
number of available channels can vary depend‐
Activating/deactivating digital radio ing on the region.
reception
1. "Radio" Switching on the Weather Band
2. "FM" or "AM" 1. "Radio"
Mobility
3. Open "Options". 2. "Weather band"

4. "HD Radio Reception" 3. Select the desired channel.
rently in use. Additional information
This symbol is displayed in the status line Weather Band is a service of the National Oce‐
Reference
when the audio signal is digital. anic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA).
173
Radio Additional information on the Internet: 3. "Category"
www.nws.noaa.gov.
Satellite radio*
General information
The channels are offered in predefined pack‐
ages. The packages must be enabled by tele‐
phone.
4. Select the Unsubscribed Channels cate‐
Navigation bar overview gory.
Symbol Function 5. Select the desired channel.

The phone number and an electronic serial
Change the list view. number, ESN, are displayed.
Select the category. 6. Select the phone number to have the chan‐
nel enabled.
Direct channel entry
Timeshift
Open the My Favorites category/

open a favorite.
Manage the favorites.
Traffic Jump
The functions of the navigation bar symbols can

You can unsubscribe from the channels again
also be stored on the programmable memory
via this phone number.
buttons, refer to page 23.
Unsubscribing from channels

Managing a subscription
1. "Radio"
To be able to enable or unsubscribe from the
channels, you must have reception. It is usually 2. "Satellite radio"
at its best when you have an unobstructed view 3. Open "Options".
of the sky. The channel name is displayed in the 4. "Manage subscription"
status line.
Enabling channels
The Unsubscribed Channels category contains
all disabled channels.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
174
5. The phone number and an electronic serial 5. Press the controller again.
At a glance
number, ESN, are displayed. 6. Press the controller again to confirm the
6. Call Sirius to unsubscribe from the chan‐ highlighted channel.
nels.
Selecting channels
You can only listen to enabled channels.
The selected channel is stored for the remote
Controls
control currently in use.
Via the iDrive

1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio" 7. Select the desired memory location.
Driving tips
3. Select "All channels" or the desired cate‐ The channels are stored for the remote control
gory. currently in use.
4. Select the desired channel. The channels can also be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons, refer to page 23.
Changing the list view
Navigation
The list view changes every time the first symbol
on the navigation bar is pressed.
Information on the channel is displayed.
Symbol Meaning
Channel name
Artist
Via the buttons on the center console
Press the button. Track
The next channel is selected.
Selecting a category
Via direct channel entry 1. "Radio"
1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio"
2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Category"
3. "Select channel" 4. Select the desired category.
4. Turn the controller until the desired channel
is reached and press the controller. Timeshift
Approx. one hour of the program being broad‐
Storing a channel cast on the channel currently being listened to
Mobility
1. "Radio" is stored in a buffer. Prerequisite: the signal must

be available.
The stored audio track can be played with a de‐
3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de‐ lay following the live broadcast. When the buffer
sired category. is full, the older tracks are overwritten. The buf‐
Reference
4. Select the desired channel. fer is cleared when a new channel is selected.
175
Opening the timeshift function
Radio 1. "Radio"
1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio"
2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Replay - Time shift"
3. "Replay - Time shift" 4. "Automatic time shift"
To deactivate: "Automatic time shift".
Storing favorites
Up to 30 favorites can be stored in the favorites
list. Available favorites are artist, track, game,
league, and team.
Storing the artist, track, or game

It is only possible to store favorites that are cur‐
▷ The red arrow shows the current playback rently being broadcast. The channel information
position. must be available.
▷ The time difference to the live broadcast is
1. "Radio"
displayed next to the buffer bar.
For live transmissions: "live".
3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de‐
Timeshift menu sired category.
4. Select the desired channel.
Symbol Function 5. Press the controller again.
Go to the live broadcast 6. Select the artist, track, or game.
Playback/pause
Storing the league or team
Next track Leagues or teams can be added to the favorites
from a selection list.
Previous track
1. "Radio"
Fast forward
Reverse 3. "Manage favorites"
Automatic timeshift deactivated/ac‐ 4. "Add sports information"
tivated
Automatic timeshift
When the function is activated, audio playback
is stopped automatically in the event of:
▷ Incoming and outgoing telephone calls.
▷ Activation of the voice activation system.
▷ Muting.
The audio playback then continues with a time 5. Select the league.
delay.
6. Select "Add all teams" or the desired team.
To activate:
176
Opening the favorites Selecting a region
At a glance
If an activated favorite is played back, the fol‐ 1. "Radio"
lowing message appears for approx. 20 sec‐ 2. "Satellite radio"
onds: "Favorite alert!".
3. Open "Options".
"Favorites"
4. "Set jump"
Select the symbol while the message is shown.
5. Select the desired region.
The region is stored for the remote control cur‐
Controls
rently in use.
Activating/deactivating the jump

1. "Radio"
Driving tips
3. "Jump to:"
Information for the selected region is broadcast
The displayed favorite is played. as soon as it is available.
If there is no message, the system changes to A new panel opens.
the My Favorites category. All favorites currently Canceling the Traffic Jump: "Cancel".
being broadcast can be selected from a list.
Navigation
Symbol Meaning
Managing the favorites
Information will be broadcast shortly.
Activating/deactivating the favorites Information is currently being broad‐
Favorites can be activated and deactivated cast.
globally and individually.
Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic
Jump.
2. "Manage favorites"
3. Select "Activate alert" or the desired favor‐ Automatic update
ites. About twice a year, Sirius performs an update of
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ the channel names and positions. The update
rently in use. takes place automatically and may take several
minutes.
Deleting favorites
1. "Satellite radio" Notes
2. "Manage favorites" ▷ Reception may not be available in some sit‐
uations, such as under certain environmen‐
3. Highlight the desired favorite.
tal or topographic conditions. The satellite
4. Open "Options". radio has no influence on this.
Mobility
5. "Delete entry" ▷ The signal may not be available in tunnels or

underground garages; next to tall buildings;
Traffic Jump or near trees, mountains or other powerful
Traffic and weather information for a selected sources of radio interference.
region is broadcast every few minutes.
Reference
177
Stored stations
Radio
General information
It is possible to store up to 40 stations.
Calling up a station
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
Storing a station
The station currently selected is stored.
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. "Store station"
4. Select the desired memory location.

The list of stored stations is stored for the re‐
mote control currently in use.
The stations can also be stored on the program‐
mable memory buttons, refer to page 23.
Deleting a station
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry"
178
CD/multimedia
At a glance
Controls 3. Select the desired CD or DVD:
Controls
Driving tips
1 Change the entertainment source
Symbol Meaning
2 CD/DVD* drive
3 Eject CD/DVD CD/DVD* player
4 Change station/track ... DVD changer*

5 Programmable memory buttons CD/DVD player, rear*
Navigation
6 Volume, on/off
Playable formats
▷ DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-
CD/DVD* RW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD
audio (video part only), DVD video*.
CD/DVD playback
▷ CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA,
Loading the CD/DVD* player VCD*, SVCD*.
Insert the CD/DVD with the printed side up. ▷ Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC.
Playback begins automatically.
Audio playback
Reading can take a few minutes with com‐
pressed audio files. Selecting the track using the button
Press the button repeatedly until the
Starting playback
desired track is played.
There is a CD/DVD in the CD/DVD player or
changer.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
Mobility
Reference
179
Selecting the track using the iDrive Displaying information on the track
CD/multimedia
Audio CDs
If information about a track has been stored, it is

displayed automatically:
Select the desired track to begin playback. ▷ Interpret.
▷ Album track.
CDs/DVDs* with compressed audio files
▷ Number of tracks on the CD/DVD.
Depending on the data, some letters and num‐
bers of the CD/DVD may not be displayed cor‐ ▷ File name of track.
rectly.
Random playback
1. Select the directory if necessary.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
To change to a higher level directory: move
2. "CD/DVD"
the controller to the left.
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Random"
2. Select the desired track to begin playback.
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files: all

tracks within the selected directory are played in
random order.
Random mode is switched off when the audio
source is changed and the ignition is switched
off.
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button.
180
Automatic repeat* 4. "DVD menu"
At a glance
The selected track, directories, or CDs/DVDs
are repeated automatically.
Video playback*
Country codes
Only DVDs with the code of the home region can
Controls
be played back; also refer to the information on
the DVD.
Code Region
VCD/SVCD
1 USA, Canada 1. "CD/Multimedia"
Driving tips
2 Japan, Europe, Middle East, South Af‐ 2. "CD/DVD"
rica 3. Select a CD with video content.
3 Southeast Asia 4. "Select track"
5. Select the desired track.
4 Australia, Central and South America,
New Zealand
Video menu
Navigation
5 Northwest Asia, North Africa To open the video menu: turn the controller
during playback.
6 China
Press the controller when "Back" is displayed.
0 All regions
Symbol Function
Playback Open the DVD menu.
The video image is displayed on the front Con‐ Start playback.
trol Display up to a speed of approx. 2 mph/3 km/
h; in some countries, it is only displayed if the Pause
parking brake is set or if the automatic trans‐
Stop
mission is in position P.
Next chapter
DVD video
Previous chapter
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD" Fast forward
3. Select a DVD with video content. Reverse
In fast forward/reverse: the speed increases ev‐

ery time the controller is pressed. To stop, start
Mobility
playback.
DVD menu
1. If necessary, turn the controller to open the
video menu.
Reference
2. "DVD menu"
181
CD/multimedia The DVD menu is displayed. The display de‐ 4. Select the desired language or "Do not
pends on the contents of the DVD. display subtitles".
3. To select menu items: move the controller
and press it.
To change to the video menu: turn the controller
and press it.
DVD/VCD settings
For some DVDs, settings can only be made via
the DVD menu; refer also to the information on
the DVD.
Selecting the language* Setting the brightness, contrast and color

The languages that are available depend on the 1. Turn the controller during playback.
DVD. 2. Open "Options".
1. Turn the controller during playback. 3. "Display settings"
2. Open "Options". 4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Color"
3. "Audio/language"

4. Select the desired language.
Selecting the zoom
Selecting the subtitles*
Display the video image on the entire screen.
The subtitles that are available depend on the
DVD. 1. Turn the controller during playback.
1. Turn the controller during playback. 2. Open "Options".
2. Open "Options". 3. "Additional options"
3. "Subtitles" 4. "Zoom mode"
182
Selecting a track Fold up the DVD changer
At a glance
DVD video: Always fold the DVD changer back up after
1. Turn the controller when the DVD menu is filling and emptying it; otherwise, the DVD
displayed. changer could be damaged.◀
2. Open "Options".
Controls and displays
3. "Additional options"
4. "Select title"
Controls
VCD/SVCD:
1. "Select track"
Driving tips
Selecting the camera angle*
The availability of a different camera angle de‐ 1 Empty DVD compartments
pends on the DVD and the current DVD track. 2 LED on DVD slot
1. Turn the controller during playback. 3 Buttons for DVD compartments
2. Open "Options". 4 DVD slot
Navigation
3. "Additional options" 5 Fill DVD compartments
4. "Viewing angle"
5. Select the desired camera angle.
Filling the DVD compartments
individually
Opening the main menu, back
These functions are not contained on every
The LED on the first empty compartment
DVD. Therefore, they may not be available for
flashes.
use.
2. Select another compartment if necessary.
DVD changer* 3. Wait for the LEDs on the DVD slot to flash.
4. Insert a single CD or DVD in the middle.
In the glove compartment
The CD/DVD is drawn in automatically and
placed into the selected compartment.
Sliding in CDs/DVDs
Do not insert the CD/DVD until the LEDs
on the DVD slot are flashing; otherwise, the CD/
DVD or the DVD changer could be damaged.
Do not continue to push on the CD/DVD; this
Mobility
may cause it to jam and prevent it from being

able to eject again.◀
Pull down the release cover.
Filling all empty DVD compartments
The DVD changer tilts down.
To close: fold the DVD changer up until it en‐ 1. Hold the button down.
Reference
gages.
183
Audio playback*
CD/multimedia The LEDs on the empty CD compartments
flash. The audio track of a DVD can be played back
2. Wait for the LEDs on the DVD slot to flash even if video playback is not possible in the ve‐
and then insert a CD or DVD into the center. hicle.
The CDs/DVDs are drawn in automatically Only the main film without the previews or extras
and placed into the vacant compartments. can be played back.
Sliding in CDs/DVDs
Starting playback
Do not insert the CD/DVD until the LEDs
on the DVD slot are flashing; otherwise, the CD/ A DVD is located in the DVD changer.
DVD or the DVD changer could be damaged. 1. "CD/Multimedia"
Do not continue to push on the CD/DVD; this 2. "CD/DVD"
may cause it to jam and prevent it from being
3. Select the desired DVD.
able to eject again.◀
After they are inserted, it may take several mi‐ Selecting a chapter using the button
nutes for the CDs/DVDs to be read in.
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired chapter is played.
Removing a single CD/DVD
1. Press the button. Selecting a chapter using iDrive

2. Select the DVD compartment. 1. "CD/Multimedia"
The CD/DVD is partially ejected. 2. "CD/DVD"
3. Remove the CD/DVD. 3. Select the desired DVD.
4. Select the desired chapter.
Removing all CDs/DVDs
1. Hold the button down. Press and hold the button.
2. Remove the CDs/DVDs.
Malfunctions Selecting the language*

If all LEDs on the DVD changer are flashing rap‐ The languages that are available depend on the
idly, a malfunction has occurred. DVD.
To eliminate the malfunction: 1. "CD/Multimedia"
1. Press one of the buttons: 2. "CD/DVD"
▷ 3. Select the desired DVD.
4. Open "Options".
▷
5. "Audio/language"
The CD/DVD last inserted is ejected. 6. Select the desired language.
2. Remove the CD/DVD.

Notes
The DVD changer is functional again after the
LEDs stop flashing rapidly. CD/DVD player and changer
Do not remove the cover
184
BMW CD/DVD players and changers are offi‐ ▷ Only label CDs/DVDs on the upper side with
At a glance
cially designated Class 1 laser products. Do not a pen intended for this purpose.
operate if the cover is damaged; otherwise, se‐
vere eye damage may occur.◀ Damage
▷ Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and
CDs and DVDs moisture.
Use of CDs/DVDs ▷ Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve.
▷ Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs ▷ Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures
Controls
with labels applied, as these can be‐ over 122 ℉/50 ℃, high humidity or direct
come detached during playback due sunlight.
to heat buildup and can cause irrepar‐
able damage to the device. CDs/DVDs with copy protection
▷ Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy pro‐
Driving tips
diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play tection feature by the manufacturer. This can
CDs/DVDs with an adapter, e.g., single CDs; mean that some CDs/DVDs cannot be played or
otherwise, the CDs or the adapter may jam can only be played to a limited extent.
and no longer eject.
▷ Do not use combined CDs/DVDs, e.g., DVD MACROVISION
Plus, as the CDs/DVDs can jam and will no This product contains copyrighted technology
longer eject.◀ that is based on multiple registered US patents
Navigation
and the intellectual property of the Macrovision
General malfunctions Corporation and other manufacturers. The use
▷ CD/DVD changers and players have been of this copy protection must be approved by
optimized for performance in vehicles. In Macrovision. Media protected by this product -
some instances they may be more sensitive unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision - may
to faulty CDs/DVDs than stationary devices only be used for private purposes. Copying of
would be. this technology is prohibited.
▷ If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check
whether it has been inserted correctly.
Music collection*
Humidity
High levels of humidity can lead to condensation Storing music
on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens, and
temporarily prevent playback. General information
Music tracks from CDs/DVDs and USB devices
Malfunctions involving individual CDs/ can be stored in the music collection on a hard
DVDs disc in the vehicle and played from there.
If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/ ▷ Audio CD: tracks are converted into a com‐
DVDs, this can be due to one of the following pressed audio format. If available, informa‐
causes: tion on the album, such as the artist, is
Mobility
stored as well.
Home-recorded CDs/DVDs ▷ CD/DVD or USB device with compressed
▷ Possible reasons for malfunctions with audio files: the entire content of the CD/DVD
home-recorded CDs/DVDs are inconsistent or the USB device is stored in the vehicle as
data creation or recording processes, or an album. The WMA, MP3, and AAC formats
Reference
poor quality or old age of the blank CD/DVD. are stored. Individual tracks and directories
185
CD/multimedia can be deleted later, Deleting a track and di‐ Observe the following during the storage proc‐
rectory, refer to page 189. ess:
Tracks with DRM copy protection can be Do not switch to the CD/DVD player and do not
stored but cannot be played back. remove the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD player as
Backing up music data this will interrupt the storage process. You can
switch to the other audio sources without inter‐
Regularly back up the music data; other‐
rupting the storage process. Tracks from the
wise, it could be lost if there is a fault on the hard
current CD/DVD that have already been stored
disk.◀
can be called up.
Music recognition technology and re‐
lated data are provided by Gracenote®. Interrupting storage
Gracenote is the industry standard in music rec‐
1. "CD/Multimedia"
ognition technology and related content deliv‐
ery. For more information, please visit 2. "CD/DVD"
www.gracenote.com. 3. "Storing..."
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc.,
copyright © 2000-2010 Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000-2010 Gracenote.
This product and service may practice one or
more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525;
#6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132,
#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,
#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pend‐
ing. Some services supplied under license from
Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
4. "Cancel storing"
Storing from a CD/DVD The storage process is interrupted and can be
continued at any time.
1. Insert a CD or DVD into the CD/DVD player.
2. "CD/Multimedia" Continuing the storage process
3. "CD/DVD" 1. "CD/Multimedia"
4. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player. 2. "CD/DVD"
5. "Store in vehicle" 3. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player.
4. "Continue storing"
Storage of the CD/DVD continues at the begin‐
ning of the track at which storage was inter‐
rupted.
Album information
During storage, information such as the name of
the artist is stored with the track, if this informa‐
tion is available in the vehicle database or on the
The music collection is displayed and the first CD.
track of the CD/DVD is played back. During the
To update the database, contact your service
storage process, the tracks are played in se‐
center.
quence.
186
Storing from a USB device 3. "Music search"
At a glance
To store music, a suitable device must be con‐
nected to the USB interface in the glove com‐
partment.
▷ Suitable devices: USB mass storage devi‐
ces, such as USB flash drives or MP3 players
with a USB interface.
▷ Unsuitable devices: USB hard discs, USB
Controls
hubs, USB memory card readers with mul‐
tiple inserts, Apple iPod/iPhone. Music from
the Apple iPod/iPhone can be played via the 4. Select the desired category.
USB audio interface in the center armrest.
1. Connect the USB device to the USB inter‐
Driving tips
face in the glove compartment, refer to
page 138.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "Music collection"
4. Open "Options".
5. "Music data import/export"
Navigation
6. "Import music (USB)" 5. Select the desired entry.
▷ Select "A-Z search", refer to page 24,
and input the desired entry.
▷ Select the desired entry from the list.
6. Select other categories if you wish.
The tracks found are listed in alphabetical
order.
Not all categories need to be selected. For
example, to search for all tracks by a certain
artist, call up that artist only. All of the tracks
Playing music by that artist are then displayed.
7. "Start play"
Music search
The list of tracks is repeated automatically.
All tracks for which additional information has
been stored can be accessed by the music Restarting the music search
search. Tracks without additional information
"New search"
can be called up via the corresponding album,
refer to page 188.
Music search using spoken instructions*
Mobility
1. "CD/Multimedia" Instructions for the voice activation system, re‐

2. "Music collection" fer to page 25.

wheel.
Reference
187
CD/multimedia 2. ›Music search‹ 1. "CD/Multimedia"
3. Open the desired category, e. g., ›Select 2. "Music collection"
artist‹.
3. Select the desired album.
4. Say the desired entry in the list.
Depending on the album, the tracks or the
5. Select other categories if you wish. subdirectories of the album are displayed.
To select a track directly: ›Title ... ‹. The first track is played automatically, if pos‐
Say the spoken instruction and the name of the sible.
desired track in a single sentence.
Current playback
List of tracks that was generated last by the mu‐
sic search or the album selected last.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "Current playback"
4. Change directories if needed to select
tracks.
To go up a level in the directory: move the
controller to the left.
Random playback
All tracks of the selection are played back in ran‐
dom order.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
4. Select the desired track, if necessary.
Top 50 3. Open "Options".
The 50 most frequently played tracks. 4. "Random"
1. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "Top 50"
4. Select the desired track, if necessary.
Albums
All stored albums, listed in order of their storage
dates.
Symbol Format
Audio CD
Compressed audio files
188
Managing music 4. Open "Options".
At a glance
5. "Delete folder" or "Delete track"
Albums
Free memory capacity
Renaming an album*
Display the free memory capacity in the music
The name of the album, if available, is automat‐ collection.
ically entered when the album is stored. If the
name is unknown it can be changed later if 1. "CD/Multimedia"
Controls
needed. 2. "Music collection"
1. "CD/Multimedia" 3. Open "Options".
2. "Music collection" 4. "Free memory"
3. Highlight the desired album.
Music collection
Driving tips
4. Open "Options".
5. "Rename album" Backing up the music collection
The entire music collection can be stored on a
USB device. Make sure there is enough free
memory capacity on the USB device.
Depending on the number of tracks, backing up
the music collection may take several hours.
Navigation
Therefore, it is best to perform the backup dur‐
ing a long trip.
1. Starting the engine.
2. Connect the USB device to the USB inter‐
6. Select the letters individually.
face in the glove compartment, refer to
page 138.
Deleting an album
3. "CD/Multimedia"
An album cannot be deleted while a track from
that album is being played. 4. "Music collection"
5. Open "Options".
1. "CD/Multimedia"
3. Highlight the desired album.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete album"
Deleting a track and directory

A track cannot be deleted while it is being
played.
Mobility
A directory cannot be deleted while a track from

that directory is being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
3. Highlight the directory or track.
Reference
189
AUX-IN port
CD/multimedia 7. "Backup music on USB"
At a glance
▷ For connecting audio devices, e.g., MP3
player. The sound is output on the vehicle
loudspeakers.
▷ Recommendation: use medium tone and
volume settings on the audio device. The
tone depends on the quality of the audio
files.
Storing the music collection in the vehicle Connecting

When storing from the USB device, the existing
music collection in the vehicle is replaced.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
3. Open "Options".
5. "Restore music from USB"
Deleting the music collection The AUX-IN port is in the center armrest.
1. "CD/Multimedia" Connect the headphones or line-out connector
2. "Music collection" of the device to the jack plug.
3. Open "Options".
Playback
4. "Delete music collection" 1. Connect the audio device, switch it on and
select a track on the audio device.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
External devices
3. If necessary, "External devices"
At a glance 4. "AUX front"
Symbol Meaning Volume

AUX-IN port The volume of the sound output is dependent
on the audio device. If this volume differs mark‐
USB audio interface*/mobile phone edly from the volume of the other audio sources,
audio interface* it is advisable to adjust the volumes.
Rear AUX-IN port*
Rear AUX-IN port on the right* 1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. If necessary, "External devices"
3. "AUX front"
190
4. "Volume" ▷ AAC.
At a glance
▷ Playback lists: M3U.
Connection of Apple iPod/iPhone via

USB audio interface
Controls
5. Turn the controller until the desired volume
is set and press the controller.
Driving tips
USB audio interface*/mobile phone
audio interface* The USB audio interface is in the center armrest.
To connect the device, use the special cable
At a glance
adapter for the Apple iPod/iPhone, available
It is possible to connect external audio devices. from your service center. The cable adapter is
They can be operated on the iDrive. The sound required for a good connection.
is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
Navigation
Use the cable adapter for the Apple
Connectors for external devices iPod/iPhone to connect the Apple
iPod/iPhone with the AUX-IN port
▷ Connection via USB audio interface: Apple
and the USB interface.
iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g., MP3 play‐
ers, USB flash drives, or mobile phones that The Apple iPod/iPhone menu
are supported by the USB audio interface. structure is supported by the USB audio inter‐
face.
▷ Connection via snap-in adapter when equip‐
ped with extended connectivity of the music
player in the mobile phone: Apple iPhone or Connection of a USB device via the
mobile phones. USB audio interface
Playback is only possible if no connector is
plugged into the USB audio interface.
Due to the large number of different audio devi‐
ces available on the market, it cannot be ensured
that every audio device/mobile phone is opera‐
ble on the vehicle.
Ask your service center about suitable audio de‐
vices/mobile phones.
The USB audio interface is in the center armrest.

Mobility
Audio files
Standard audio files can be played back: Connect using a flexible adapter cable to protect
the USB audio interface and the USB device
▷ MP3.
against physical damage.
▷ WMA.
▷ WAV (PCM).
Reference
191
Track search
CD/multimedia Connect the USB device to the
USB interface. Selection is possible via:
▷ Playback lists.
▷ Information: type of music, artist, album,
track.
After connecting for the first time
▷ Additionally for USB devices: file directory,
Information on all music tracks, e.g. artist or type composer.
of music, as well as playback lists are transmit‐
Tracks are displayed if they have been saved in
ted into the vehicle. This may take some time,
the Latin alphabet.
depending on the USB device and the number
of tracks.
Starting the track search
During transmission, the tracks can be called up
1. "CD/Multimedia"
via the file directory.
2. "External devices"
Number of tracks 3. Select the symbol.
Information from up to four USB devices or for 4. Select the desired category, e.g., "Genre" or
approx. 16,000 tracks can be stored in the ve‐ "Artist".
hicle. If a fifth device is connected or if more than All entries are displayed in a list.
16,000 tracks are stored, information on exist‐
ing tracks may be deleted. ▷ Open "A-Z search" and input the de‐
sired entry. When a letter is entered, the
Copy protection results are filtered using this letter as the
first letter. If multiple letters are entered,
Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Man‐ all results that contain that sequence are
agement (DRM) cannot be played. displayed.
▷ Select the desired entry from the list.
Playback
1. "CD/Multimedia"
5. Select other categories if you wish.

Not all categories need to be selected. For
example, if all of the tracks by a certain artist
are to be displayed, call up that artist only.
The playback starts with the first track. All of the tracks by that artist are then dis‐
When an Apple iPhone is connected via the played.
snap-in adapter and an audio device is con‐ 6. "Start play"
nected to the AUX-IN port at the same time, the
audio signal of the AUX-IN port is played. Restarting a track search
On the Splitscreen*, the CD cover for the music "New search"
track might be displayed after a few seconds.
192
Playback lists ▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or
At a glance
Calling up playback lists. lamps to the USB audio interface.
▷ Do not connect USB hard drives.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
▷ Do not use the audio interface to recharge
external devices.
4. "Playlists"
Controls
Current playback
List of tracks currently being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Driving tips
4. "Current playback"
Random playback
The current list of tracks is played back in ran‐
dom order.
Navigation
1. "CD/Multimedia"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Random"
Press and hold the button for the cor‐
responding direction.
Notes
Do not expose the audio device to extreme en‐
vironmental conditions, such as very high tem‐
peratures; refer to the audio device operating
instructions.
Depending on the configuration of the audio
files, e.g., bit rates greater than 256 kbit/s, the
files may not play back correctly in each case.
Information on connection
Mobility
▷ The connected audio device is supplied with

a max. power of 500 mA if supported by the
device. Therefore, do not connect the de‐
vice to the power socket in the vehicle.
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
Reference
nector into the USB interface.
193
Rear entertainment*
Rear entertainment
Controls Rear entertainment and screens are switched

on/off.
After switching off the ignition, the system must
be switched on again.
Screens
Adjusting
Danger of burns when screen is folded out
1 Screen, left Do not reach behind the screen; other‐
2 Screen, right wise, there is the danger of getting burned. The
3 Center armrest, remote control back of the screen can become very hot.◀
4 CD/DVD player
Rear CD/DVD player
▷ To fold out: pull at the bottom edge.

▷ To fold in: press against the bottom edge.
Notes
1 CD/DVD slot ▷ Do not cover lower screen edge, since this
is where the sensors and the infrared inter‐
2 Eject CD/DVD
face are installed.
3 On/off, right
▷ When loading the rear seats and adjusting
4 Headphone connection, right the backrest of the front seat, fold in the
5 RCA sockets screens.
6 Headphone connection, left ▷ When using the through-loading system*,
7 On/off, left fold the screens down.
▷ When cleaning the screen, follow the care
instructions, refer to page 251.
Switching the system on/off
Press the left or right side of the button
on the CD/DVD player in the rear for the
respective page.
194
Remote control Press the but‐ Function
At a glance
ton
In the center armrest in the rear
Adjusts the volume.
Switches the volume adjust‐

ment to the left/right.
For Rear seat entertainment
Controls
Professional*: Switch over
between the display screens.
The transmission time of the remote control is

Storage is possible in a horizontal position in the limited by law. To execute a function again,
Driving tips
center armrest. press or turn the required button again.
Menu navigation Replacing the batteries

No rechargeable batteries
Press the but‐ Function Do not use rechargeable batteries, as
ton damage may result from the substances in the
batteries.◀
Navigation
Operating concept as for the
front controller.
Turn the wheel: highlight a
menu item.
Press the center knob: con‐
firm the selection.
Press the arrow buttons:
change between panels.
Opens the main menu.

1. Remove the cover. Press on the cover, ar‐
Displays the previous menu. row 1, and push forward, arrow 2.
2. Insert batteries of the same type.
Opens the "Options" menu. 3. Close the cover.
Take the used battery to a recycling cen‐
Changes the station, track or ter or to your service center.
chapter.
Press and hold the button:
fast forward/reverse. Controls
Mobility
Almost all functions can be operated in the same

manner as they are in the front. Special features
of operating the system in the rear are described
here.
Reference
195
Audio/video playback
Rear entertainment When music collections are selected in the front
and rear, they are played back separately.
Audio Operation is the same as for the front music col‐
Audio can be played back via rear entertainment lection, refer to page 185.
from any source in the vehicle.
Operation is the same as for the front audio play‐ Tone
back, refer to page 179. Only treble and bass can be set in the rear. The
settings are made separately for the left and
Video right headphones.
Video can be played back in the rear from the Operation is the same as for the front tone, refer
following sources: to page 170.
▷ DVD changer*.
Contacts*
▷ Rear CD/DVD player.
Operation is the same as for the front contacts,
▷ External device in rear.
refer to page 211.
If a video image is being played back in the rear,
the rear CD/DVD player cannot be selected in Navigation*
the front.
Route planning can be performed separately on
Operation is the same as for the front video play‐ the left and right sides in the rear. Destination
back, refer to page 181. guidance can only be started from the front.
Operation is the same as for the front navigation,
Radio refer to page 152.
When the same radio source is selected in the
front and rear (e.g., FM/AM), the same radio sta‐ Suggesting a destination
tion is played.
A destination or trip can be sent to the front as
Operation is the same as for the front radio, refer a suggestion. The suggestion can be adopted,
to page 172. stored, or declined in the front. This function is
not available with the following setting: "Driver
CD/multimedia control".
CD/DVD 1. Enter the destination.

When the same audio source (front CD/DVD 2. "Suggest destination"
player, rear CD/DVD player, DVD changer) is se‐
lected in the front and rear, the same material is BMW Assist*
played. Operation is the same as for BMW Assist in the
Operation is the same as for the front CD/DVD, front, refer to page 214.
refer to page 179.
Adjusting
Notes on CDs/DVDs, refer to page 184.
The following settings are available:
Music collection* ▷ "Rear displays"
Music can only be stored and data can only be ▷ "Language/Units": language can be set
exported and imported via the front CD/DVD globally for all screens.
player or the USB interface in the glove com‐ ▷ "Tone"
partment.
▷ If necessary, "Climate"
196
Vehicle information* 2. "Select rear source"
At a glance
Computer content can be displayed. Operation 3. Select the desired audio or video source.
is only possible in the front.
Same priority
Options menu ▷ All audio and video sources can be operated
The split screen is not available and there is no via the iDrive in the front and rear.
integrated Owner's Manual. ▷ Sound is output in the rear via headphones:
Operation is the same as for the front menu op‐ the source selected via the iDrive in the front
Controls
tions, refer to page 21. is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
▷ Sound is output via loudspeakers: the
source selected last via the iDrive in the front
Enabling or rear is output via the vehicle loudspeak‐
ers.
Driving tips
Enabling operation in the rear
Only possible via the iDrive in the front. The rear has priority
▷ When the source selected in the rear is
1. "Settings"
played on headphones, it can be selected
2. "Allow rear control" but not operated via iDrive in the front. Other
3. Select the desired priority. audio or video sources can be operated.
Navigation
▷ Sound is output in the rear via headphones:
the source selected via the iDrive in the front
is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
▷ Sound is output via loudspeakers: the
source selected in the rear is output on the
vehicle loudspeakers. Audio or video sour‐
ces cannot be selected via the iDrive in the
front.
Switching off the rear DVD

Priority options ▷ Rear entertainment is switched off.
▷ To switch rear entertainment back on: select
The driver has priority
a different priority via the iDrive in the front
▷ The source selected via iDrive in the front is and switch on the system, refer to
output on the vehicle loudspeakers and can page 194.
be selected but not operated from the rear.
Other audio or video sources can be oper‐
ated.
Headphones, vehicle
▷ Sound can only be output in the rear via
loudspeakers
headphones.
Mobility
▷ The source that is to be displayed in the rear Connecting the headphones

can be set via the iDrive in the front.
To set the source in the rear via the iDrive in the Normal headphones
front: Connect via the jack 1/8"/3.5 mm, refer to
page 194, on the rear CD/DVD player.
1. Open "Options".
Reference
197
Infrared headphones
Rear entertainment 2. Connect the external device to the RCA
Connection via the infrared interface on the sockets.
lower edge of the screen. ▷ Video: yellow socket.
Fitting infrared headphones and information on ▷ Audio: white and red socket.
which headphones are supported can be ob‐
tained from your service center. Starting playback
When using infrared headphones, ensure that 1. "CD/Multimedia"
the connection between the headphones and 2. "External devices"
the infrared interface is not disrupted:
3. Select the or symbol.
▷ Do not place an obstacle between the inter‐
face and headphones.
▷ Do not cover the interface.
▷ Do not scratch the interface.
Fold up display screens for interference-free re‐
ception.
Unfavorable light conditions such as bright am‐
bient light can impair reception.
Sound output on the headphones or

vehicle loudspeakers Volume
Operation is only possible in the rear. The volume of the sound output is dependent
on the audio device. If this volume differs mark‐
1. Open "Options". edly from the volume of the other audio sources,
2. "Headphones" or "Loudspeakers" it is advisable to adjust the volumes.
With the following setting, sound output in the
rear is not possible via the vehicle speakers: Adjusting the volume
"Driver control". The volume can only be adjusted if no external
video device is connected.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
External devices
General information 3. Select the or symbol.
External audio and video devices and digital 4. "Volume"
cameras can be connected to cinch sockets, re‐
fer to page 194, on the CD/DVD player. Opera‐
tion takes place on the external device.
Due to the large number of different audio and
video devices available on the market, it cannot
be ensured that every audio and video device
will be displayed correctly on the screen.
Connecting an external device

1. Fold down the cover in front of the cinch 5. Turn the controller until the desired volume
sockets on the CD/DVD player. is set and press the controller.
198
What to do if...
At a glance
▷ Only a black screen is visible.
Switch on the system.
▷ There are no options available on the
screen.
Replace remote control batteries.
With Professional rear seat entertainment
Controls
toggle between screens if necessary.
▷ Radio stations or TV channels are grayed
out and can not be selected.
Function is limited due to the selected pri‐
ority. Change priority.
Driving tips
▷ The DVD does not play.
Playback does not begin automatically.
Start DVD manually, refer to page 181.
▷ The volume of the rear vehicle speakers
cannot be adjusted.
Navigation
Sound in the rear is output via the head‐
phones. Change priority if necessary and
output sound via vehicle speakers.
Mobility
Reference
199
200
Communication
All of the options available to you for mobile
communication with family, friends, business
partners, and service providers are described in
this chapter.
201
Telephone*
Telephone
At a glance Do not operate a mobile phone that is connected

to the vehicle on the mobile phone keypad, as
The concept this may lead to a malfunction.
After the mobile phone is paired once with the
vehicle, the mobile phone can be operated using
the iDrive, the steering wheel buttons and spo‐ Pairing/unpairing the mobile
ken instructions. phone
A paired mobile phone is automatically detected
as soon as it is located inside the vehicle, when Requirements
the ignition is switched on. ▷ The mobile phone is suitable.
Up to four mobile phones can be paired. ▷ The mobile phone is ready for operation.
▷ Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle, refer to
Using the mobile phone while driving
page 203, and on the mobile phone.
Make entries only when traffic and road
▷ Bluetooth presettings may need to be made
conditions allow. Do not hold the mobile phone
on the mobile phone, e.g., for a connection
in your hand while you are driving; use the
without confirmation or visibility, refer to the
hands-free system instead. If you do not ob‐
mobile phone operating instructions.
serve this precaution, you can endanger the ve‐
hicle occupants and other road users.◀ ▷ A number with at least four and a maximum
of 16 digits is defined as the Bluetooth pass‐
Snap-in adapter* key. It is only required once for pairing.
The snap-in adapter is used to: ▷ The ignition is switched on.
▷ Hold the mobile phone.
Pairing and connecting
▷ Recharge the battery.
Pairing the mobile phone
▷ Connect the mobile phone to an outside an‐
To avoid becoming distracted and posing
tenna of the vehicle.
an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi‐
This provides for better network reception cle's occupants and to other road users, only
and consistent sound quality. pair the mobile phone while the vehicle is sta‐
tionary.◀
Approved mobile phones
Pair the vehicle entirely on the front or rear Con‐
Inquire with your service center which mobile trol Display.
phones containing a Bluetooth interface are
supported by the mobile phone preparation 1. "Telephone"
package. Additional information can be found at 2. "Bluetooth (telephone)"
www.bmw.com/bluetooth.
3. "Add new phone"
These approved mobile phones with a certain
software version, support the vehicle functions
described below.
Malfunctions may occur with other mobile
phones or software versions.
202
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐ and/or mobile phone to the vehicle; this de‐
At a glance
played. pends on the mobile phone.
▷ Four mobile phones can be paired.
▷ Specific settings may be necessary in some
mobile phones, e.g., authorization or a se‐
cure connection; refer to the mobile phone
operating instructions.
Controls
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth
Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Comply
with all safety guidelines and regulations.
4. To perform additional steps on the mobile
1. "Telephone"
phone, refer to the mobile phone operating
Driving tips
instructions: for instance, search for or con‐ 2. Open "Options".
nect the Bluetooth device or a new device. 3. "Bluetooth"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile phone display.
5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the mobile phone display.
Navigation
You are prompted by the iDrive or mobile
phone to enter the same Bluetooth passkey.
6. Enter the passkey and confirm.
Connecting a particular mobile phone
If more than one mobile phone is detected by the
vehicle, the mobile phone at the top of the list is
connected. A different mobile phone can be
connected by selecting it.
1. "Telephone"
If the pairing was successful, the mobile phone 2. "Bluetooth (telephone)"
appears at the top of the list of mobile phones. All paired mobile phones are listed.
Four mobile phones can be paired with the ve‐ 3. Select the mobile phone that is to be con‐
hicle at once. nected.
If pairing was unsuccessful: what to do if, refer
to page 204.
Following the initial pairing

Mobility
▷ The mobile phone is detected/connected in

the vehicle within 2 minutes if the engine is
running or the ignition is switched on.
▷ After they have been identified, phone book
entries are transferred from the SIM card
Reference
203
Unpairing the mobile phone
Telephone ▷ The mobile phone no longer reacts? Switch
1. "Telephone" the mobile phone off and on again.
2. "Bluetooth (telephone)" ▷ Repeat the pairing procedure.
All paired mobile phones are listed. ▷ If all items on the list have been checked and
the mobile phone still cannot be paired,
3. Highlight the mobile phone that is to be un‐
please contact Customer Relations.
paired.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Remove phone from list" Controls
Incoming call
Receiving calls
If the number of the caller is stored in the phone
book and is transmitted by the network, the
name of the contact is displayed.
Accepting a call
What to do if... Via the button on the steering wheel

Not all phone book entries are displayed. Press the button.
▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is
not yet complete; note the display in the sta‐
Via the instrument cluster
tus field.
"Accept"
▷ It may only be possible to transmit the phone
book entries on the SIM card* or the mobile
Via the iDrive
phone.
"Accept"
▷ It may not be possible to display phone book
entries with special characters.
▷ The number of phone book entries to be
stored is too high.
The mobile phone cannot be paired.
▷ Is the mobile phone supported? For infor‐
mation, contact your service center.
▷ Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
phone and the vehicle match? Enter the
same passkey on the mobile phone and via
iDrive. Rejecting a call
▷ Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter
the passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure. Via the instrument cluster
▷ Are too many Bluetooth devices connected "Reject"

to the mobile phone? If so, delete the con‐
nections with other devices on the mobile Via the iDrive
phone. "Reject"
204
Ending a call Calls with multiple parties
At a glance
Via the button on the steering wheel General information
Press the button. You can switch between calls and connect two
calls to a single conference call. These functions
must be supported by the mobile phone and
Via the instrument cluster service provider.
"End call"
Controls
Accepting a call while speaking to
Via the iDrive another party
1. "Telephone" This function might have to be activated by the
service provider and the mobile phone must be
2. "Active calls"
adjusted accordingly.
3. Select an active call.
Driving tips
If a second call comes in during an active call,
you will hear a call waiting signal.
"Accept"
The call is accepted and the existing call is put
on hold.
Establishing a second call
Navigation
Establish an additional call during an active call.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
Entering a phone number
3. "Hold"
Dialing a number The existing call is put on hold.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Dial number"
3. Select the digits individually.
4. Dial the new phone number or select it from

a list.
Switching between two calls, hold call

Mobility
Active call: indicated by a red handset.

The phone number can also be entered by voice.
Call on hold: indicated by a green handset.
To switch to the call on hold, select this handset.
Reference
205
Establishing a conference call
Telephone Select the symbol. Contact with one
Two calls can be connected to a single tele‐ phone number. The connection is being es‐
phone conference call. tablished.
2. Select the symbol. Contact with more
1. Establish two calls.
than one phone number. Select the phone
2. "Conference call" number, the connection is being estab‐
lished.
A telephone call is not possible, the mobile
phone has no coverage or no network or a Serv‐
ice Request is active.
Editing a contact
Change the entries in "Contacts". When a con‐
tact is changed, the changes are not stored on
the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored
When terminating a conference call, both calls in the vehicle.
are ended. If one call is terminated by another
1. Highlight the contact.
party, the other call can be continued.
2. Open "Options".
Phone book 3. "Edit entry"
The contact can be edited.
Displays
The phone book accesses the contacts and Redialing
shows all contacts for which a phone number
has been stored. The entries can be selected to General information
make a call. The eight phone numbers dialed last are dis‐
1. "Telephone" played.
2. "Phone book"
Dialing the number via the instrument
All contacts with a phone number are displayed. cluster
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
This is possible when there is no active call.
contacts, refer to page 211.

wheel.
2. Select the desired phone number.
The connection is established.
Dialing the number via the iDrive

1. "Telephone"
2. "Redial"
3. Select the desired entry.
Calling a contact
1. Select the desired contact.
206
Deleting a single entry or all entries Saving an entry in the contacts
At a glance
1. Highlight the entry. 1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options". 2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list" 3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
Saving an entry in the contacts 4. Select the type of number: "Home",
1. Highlight the entry. "Business", "Mobile" or "Other"
Controls
2. Open "Options". 5. Complete the entries if necessary.
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing 6. If necessary. "Store contact".
contact"
4. Select the type of number: "Home", Messages
"Business", "Mobile" or "Other" Display of different messages:
Driving tips
5. Complete the entries if necessary. ▷ My Info messages from the BMW Assist
6. If necessary. "Store contact". portal.
▷ Message from the Concierge service, refer
Received calls to page 215.
Displaying calls MyInfo
Navigation
The 20 calls that were last received are
displayed. Starting destination guidance
1. Select the message.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest."
2. "Received calls"
Dialing the number in the message
2. "Call"
Message from the Concierge service
Using an address in destination guidance

2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
Calling a number from the list dest."
Selecting an entry.
Deleting a single entry or all entries

Mobility
1. Highlight the entry.

2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list"
3. Start destination guidance, if necessary.

Reference
207
Voice operation*
Telephone Dialing the number in the message
2. "Call" The concept
▷ The mobile phone can be operated without
Storing an address taking your hands from the steering wheel.
1. Select the message. ▷ In many cases, the entries are accompanied
2. Open "Options". by announcements or questions.
3. "Store contact in vehicle" ▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system.
Deleting messages
Using voice activation
1. Highlight the message.
2. Open "Options". Activating the voice activation system
3. "Delete message" or "Delete all messages"
1. Briefly press the button on the
Hands-free system steering wheel.
2. Say the command.
General information
Calls that are being made on the hands-free Terminating the voice activation
system can be continued on the mobile phone system
and vice versa. Briefly press the button on the steering
wheel or ›Cancel‹.
From the mobile phone to the hands-
free system
Possible commands
Calls that were begun outside of the Bluetooth
range of the vehicle can be continued on the Having possible commands read aloud
hands-free system with the ignition switched
Press the button. ›Help‹. Possible commands
on.
are announced.
Depending on the mobile phone, the system au‐
The digits from zero to nine are recognized. The
tomatically switches to the hands-free system.
digits can be spoken separately or combined in
If the system does not switch over automatically, a sequence to accelerate the entry.
follow the instructions on the mobile phone dis‐
play; refer also to the mobile phone operating Using alternative commands
instructions.
In many cases, the system is able to recognize
several commands to execute the same func‐
From the hands-free system to the tion, such as the following:
mobile phone
›Dial name‹ or ›Name‹
Calls that are made on the hands-free system
can in some cases be continued on the mobile
Example: dialing a phone number
phone; this depends on the mobile phone.
Follow the instructions on the mobile phone dis‐ 1. Briefly press the button on the
play; refer also to the mobile phone operating steering wheel.
instructions.
2. ›Dial number‹
The system says: »Please say the number«
208
3. E.g., ›123 456 790‹ Deleting an entry
At a glance
The system says: »123 456 790. Continue? 1. ›Delete name‹
« 2. Say the name after being prompted to do so.
4. ›Dial number‹ 3. Confirm the query with ›Yes‹.
The system says: »Dialing number«
Deleting all entries
Calling 1. ›Delete phone book‹
Controls
The dialog for deleting the phone book is
Dialing a phone number
opened.
1. ›Dial number‹
2. Confirm the query with ›Yes‹.
2. Say the phone number.
3. Confirm the query again with ›Yes‹.
3. ›Dial‹
Driving tips
Reading and selecting entries
Correcting the phone number
1. ›Read phone book‹
The sequence of digits can be deleted after the
The dialog for reading the phone book is
system has repeated the digits.
opened.
›Correct number‹
2. Say ›Dial number‹ when the desired entry is
The command can be repeated as often as nec‐ read.
essary.
Navigation
Selecting an entry
Deleting a phone number
1. ›Dial name‹
›Delete‹
2. Say the name after being prompted to do so.
All digits entered up to that point are deleted.
3. Confirm the query with ›Yes‹.
Redialing
›Redial‹
Turn the knob during an announcement.
Voice phone book* ▷ The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
Depending on how your vehicle is equipped, it
may be necessary to create your own voice ▷ The volume is stored for the remote control
phone book. currently in use.
The entries must be entered using voice activa‐
tion and are separate from the memory in the
Notes
mobile phone. Up to 50 entries can be set up. Do not use the voice activation system to initiate
an Emergency Request. In stressful situations,
Saving an entry the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can
unnecessarily delay the establishment of a tel‐
1. ›Save name‹
ephone connection.
2. Say the name. Do not exceed the speaking
Mobility
Instead, use the SOS button*, refer to

duration of approx. 2 seconds.
page 244, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.
3. Say the phone number after being prompted
to do so by the system.
4. ›Save‹
Reference
209
Environmental conditions Inserting the mobile phone
Telephone
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
▷ Keep the doors and windows closed to pre‐
vent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
1. Depending on the mobile phone, remove
the protective cap from the antenna con‐
nector of the mobile phone.
Snap-in adapter*
2. Slide the mobile phone with the buttons fac‐
Installation position ing up in the direction of the electrical con‐
nections, arrow 1, and push downward, ar‐
In the center armrest.
row 2 until it engages.
Inserting the snap-in adapter
Removing the mobile phone
1. Press the button and remove the cover.
Press the button and remove the mobile phone.

2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front, ar‐
row 1, and press down, arrow 2, until it en‐
gages.
210
Contacts
At a glance
General information 7. If necessary, "Store".
8. "Store contact in vehicle"
Contacts can be created and edited. The con‐
tacts from the mobile phone are displayed as
Specifying a contact as the home
well if this function is supported by the mobile
address
Controls
phone. The addresses can be adopted as des‐
tinations for navigation and the phone numbers A contact can be stored as the home address. It
can be dialed directly. is placed at the top of "My contacts".
1. "Home"
2. Create a contact.
New contact
Driving tips
1. "Contacts"
2. "New contact"
My contacts
General information
A list of all contacts in the vehicle and mobile
phone.
Navigation
Displaying contacts
1. "Contacts"
2. "My contacts"
3. The entry fields are still filled with the previ‐
ous entries: "Delete input fields"
4. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next
to the entry field.
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. An

A-Z search is offered, refer to page 24, if there
are 30 or more contacts.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts:
Mobility
5. Enter the text, refer to page 24.

6. When equipped with a navigation system:
Enter the address. Only addresses con‐
tained in the navigation data in the vehicle
can be entered. This ensures that destina‐
tion guidance is possible for all addresses.
Reference
211
Contacts Symbol Storage location 2. Open "Options".
3. "Check as destination"
No symbol In the vehicle; the address has not
been checked as a destination. 4. Correct and store the address if necessary.
If the address is corrected and stored, a copy of
In the vehicle; the address has it is stored in the vehicle. The address is not
been checked as a destination. changed on the mobile phone.
Mobile phone
Dialing phone numbers*
Displaying the detailed view 1. "My contacts"
Select the desired contact. 2. Select the desired contact.
All fields that have been filled in for that contact 3. Select the desired phone number.
are displayed. The connection is established.
Selecting the name display Editing a contact

Names can be displayed in a different order. 1. "My contacts"
1. "My contacts" 2. Select the desired contact.
2. Highlight the contact. 3. "Edit contact"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
last name"
Depending on how the contacts were stored on
your mobile phone, the names may be displayed
differently than the display selected.
Selecting the contact as a navigation

destination*
4. Change the entries.
1. "My contacts"
5. Move the controller to the left.
2. Select the desired contact.
6. "Yes"
3. Select the desired address.
If a contact from the mobile phone is edited, the
When contacts from the mobile phone are used,
changes are not stored on the mobile phone. A
the address may need to be matched to the nav‐
copy of the entry is stored in the vehicle, and only
igation data contained in the vehicle. In this case:
this copy is displayed. Under certain circum‐
Correct the address. stances, a contact entry with the same name is
created.
Checking the address as a
destination* Deleting contacts
An address that is to be used for destination Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are
guidance must match the navigation data con‐ deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone can‐
tained in the vehicle. The address can be not be deleted.
checked for this purpose.
1. "My contacts"
1. Select the desired contact and highlight the
2. Highlight the contact.
address.
212
3. Open "Options".
At a glance
4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts".
Exporting/importing contacts
Contacts can be exported and imported via the
Personal Profile, refer to page 33.
Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
Mobility
Reference
213
BMW Assist
BMW Assist
BMW Assist* serious accident. If possible, the BMW As‐

sist Response Center then speaks with you
General information and takes further steps to help you.
BMW Assist provides you with various services, ▷ Enhanced Roadside Assistance: BMW
for instance, transmission of the position data of Roadside Assistance* can be contacted if
your vehicle to the BMW Assist Response Cen‐ assistance is needed in the event of a break‐
ter if an Emergency Request* is initiated. down. If possible, the vehicle and position
data are transmitted in the process.
Many BMW Assist services depend on the indi‐
vidually agreed upon contract. ▷ Customer Relations: connection with Cus‐
tomer Relations for information on all as‐
After your contract has expired, the BMW Assist
pects of your vehicle.
system will be deactivated by the BMW Assist
Response Center without your having to visit a ▷ TeleService: data on your vehicle's service
service center. After the BMW Assist system status or required inspections are transmit‐
has been deactivated, no BMW Assist services ted to your service center, either automati‐
will be available. The BMW Assist system can be cally before a service due date or when you
reactivated by a service center after you sign a request a BMW service appointment.
new contract. ▷ Remote Door Unlock: the BMW Assist Re‐
sponse Center provides assistance if, for ex‐
Requirements ample, the remote control is not available
▷ The installed BMW Assist system is logged and the vehicle needs to be opened.
in to a wireless communications network. ▷ Stolen Vehicle Recovery: after you report
This network must be capable of transmit‐ that your vehicle was stolen to the police, the
ting the services. BMW Assist Response Center can deter‐
▷ To transmit position data, the vehicle must mine its position.
be able to determine the current position. ▷ In addition to these services, the optional
▷ To activate and update BMW Assist, a GPS Convenience Plan offers a Concierge serv‐
signal must be available. ice and information for route planning, traf‐
fic, and weather. A limited number of calls
▷ The BMW Assist service contract was
can be made via the BMW Assist Response
signed with your service center or with the
Center with Critical Calling if, for example,
BMW Assist Response Center. Enabling
the mobile phone is not available or dis‐
must have been completed.
charged.
▷ BMW Assist is activated.
Press the SOS button to contact the BMW
Assist Response Center.
Services offered
▷ You can also access the BMW Assist Con‐
▷ Emergency Request: when you press the
cierge service via the Internet.
SOS button, a connection to the BMW As‐
sist Response Center is established. The
BMW Assist Response Center then speaks
with you and takes further steps to help you.
▷ Automatic Collision Notification: under cer‐
tain conditions, a connection is established
to the BMW Assist Response Center after a
214
TeleService* 2. "Concierge"
At a glance
General information
TeleService supports communication with your
service center.
▷ Data on the vehicle's service requirements
can be sent directly to the service center. In
this way, the service center can plan its work
Controls
in advance. This shortens the duration of the
service appointment.
▷ In the event of a breakdown, data on the ve‐ 3. "Start service"
hicle's condition can be sent directly to A voice connection is established with the BMW
Roadside Assistance. Assist Concierge service. Phone numbers and
Driving tips
▷ The service varies by country. addresses can be transmitted to the vehicle.
▷ Connection costs may ensue. Open the message via the message list, refer to
page 207.
▷ Services may be restricted abroad.
Requirements
Roadside Assistance
▷ BMW Assist is activated.
Navigation
▷ Wireless reception is available. At a glance
▷ The engine is running. BMW Roadside Assistance* can be contacted if
assistance is needed in the event of a break‐
down.
Concierge service*
Starting Roadside Assistance
General information
The BMW Assist Concierge service offers infor‐ Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist
mation on events, gas stations or hotels, and or TeleService
provides phone numbers and addresses. Hotels 1. "BMW Assist"
can be booked directly by the BMW Assist Con‐ 2. "Roadside Assistance"
cierge service. The Concierge service is part of
The Roadside Assistance number is dis‐
the optional Convenience Plan.
played. If the mobile phone* is paired, a con‐
nection is established to Roadside Assis‐
Starting the Concierge service
tance.
1. "BMW Assist"
Mobility
Reference
215
Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or Activating BMW Assist*
BMW Assist
TeleService
1. "BMW Assist" General information
2. "Roadside Assistance" If the services included in a Assist subscription
3. "Start service" are not displayed, they may need to be activated.
Activating
1. Make sure that the vehicle can determine its
current position. Reception is usually best
when you have an unobstructed view of the
sky.
3. "Activate BMW Assist"
Activation may take several minutes. If another
menu is opened, activation continues running in
TeleService Diagnosis* the background.
TeleService Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that are
important for vehicle diagnosis. These data are BMW Search*
transmitted automatically.
After the data are transmitted, the voice con‐ At a glance
nection to Roadside Assistance is re-estab‐ A business search can be opened via BMW
lished. Search.
License conditions
TeleService Help*
This product contains NetFront Browser soft‐
TeleService Help enables an in-depth diagnosis ware of ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2007
of the vehicle by Roadside Assistance via wire‐ ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
less transmission.
NetFront is a trademark or registered trademark
TeleService Help can be started after a prompt of ACCESS CO., LTD., in Japan and other coun‐
by Roadside Assistance and the termination of tries.
the voice connection.
This software is based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.
Starting TeleService Help
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place. Requirements
2. Set the parking brake. ▷ Subscription to the optional Convenience
3. The engine is running. Plan.
4. "TeleService Help" ▷ The date setting, refer to page 76, on the
After completion of TeleService Help, a voice Control Display is current.
connection is established to Roadside Assis‐ ▷ The vehicle is located within wireless net‐
tance. work coverage.
Starting BMW Search

1. "BMW Assist"
216
2. "BMW Search" Customer Relations
At a glance
At a glance
Contact Customer Relations for information on
all aspects of your vehicle.
Calling Customer Relations
Controls
Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist
or TeleService
3. If necessary, "OK". 1. "BMW Assist"
The BMW Search home page is displayed. 2. "Customer Relations"
The Customer Relations phone number is dis‐
Driving tips
Using BMW Search played. If the mobile phone* is paired, a con‐
To start a search: nection is established to Customer Relations.
▷ Turn the controller to highlight an element.
▷ Press the controller to display an element.
Opening the start page
Navigation
1. Open "Options".
2. "Display start page"
Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or
TeleService
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Customer Relations"
3. "Start service"
Loading a new page

1. Open "Options".
Service Request*
2. "Reload" At a glance
Sends information to your service partner to re‐
Cancel
quest the arrangement of a service appoint‐
1. Open "Options". ment. The TeleService data is transmitted dur‐
2. "Cancel loading" ing a Service Request. If possible, your service
Mobility
partner will establish contact with you.
Starting a Service Request

1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Service Request"
Reference
217
Data transfer*
BMW Assist 3. "Start service"
The status of the data transfer is displayed.

1. "BMW Assist"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Data transfer"
Services status*
Displaying available services
Display of all services available in the vehicle.
Automatic Service Request*
1. "BMW Assist"
The TeleService data necessary for servicing
the vehicle are automatically sent to your service 2. "Service status"
partner prior to the service deadline. If possible, 3. "Available services"
the service partner will contact you and a service
appointment can be arranged. Activating BMW Assist
To check when your service partner was noti‐ If the services included in a Assist subscription
fied: are not displayed, they may need to be activated.
1. "Vehicle Info" "Activate BMW Assist"
2. "Vehicle status"
Activating TeleService
TeleService may need to be activated in the ve‐
hicle.
"Activate TeleService"
Deactivating TeleService
Even if the services of TeleService have been
deactivated, a voice connection to Roadside As‐
sistance is still possible.
3. Open "Options". "Deactivate TeleService"
4. "Last Service Request"
TeleService report*
Transmits technical data that is evaluated for the
ongoing development of BMW products from
your vehicle to BMW in regular intervals if nec‐
essary.
TeleService report is activated in vehicles with
certain technical prerequisites and with a valid
Assist contract and is free of charge for you.
Neither personal data nor position data is trans‐
mitted.
218
219
220
Mobility
To ensure that you remain mobile at all times, this
chapter supplies you with important information
on the topics of fuels and lubricants, wheels and
tires, service, maintenance, and Roadside
Assistance.
221
Refueling
Refueling
Fuel cap Do not pinch the retaining strap attached to the

cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed prop‐
Opening erly and fuel vapors can escape.
1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler A message is displayed if the cap is loose or
flap. missing.◀
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap

In the event of an electrical malfunction, for ex‐
ample.
2. Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise.
Pull the green knob with the fuel pump symbol.

This releases the fuel filler flap.
Observe the following when

refueling
3. Place the fuel filler cap in the bracket at‐ The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
tached to the fuel filler flap. off the first time.
Handling fuels
Obey safety regulations posted at the gas
station.◀
Fuel tank capacity

Fuel tank capacity: approx. 18.5 US gal/70 liters
Refuel promptly
Refuel below a range of 30 miles/50 km;
Closing
otherwise, engine functions are not ensured and
Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly damage may occur.◀
hear a click.
Do not pinch the retaining strap
222
Fuel
At a glance
Fuel quality Should you encounter driveability problems
which you suspect could be related to the fuel
Refuel with unleaded fuel only you are using, we recommend that you respond
Do not use leaded fuel as this would per‐ by switching to a recognized high-quality brand
manently damage the catalytic converter.◀ such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier
Controls
Detergent Gasoline.
Do not refuel with ethanol
Failure to comply with these recommendations
Do not refuel with E85, i.e., fuel with an
may result in unscheduled maintenance.◀
ethanol content of 85 %, or with Flex Fuel, as this
would damage the engine and fuel supply sys‐
tem.◀
Driving tips
Required fuel
Gasoline with lower AKI

The minimum AKI Rating is 89.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
Navigation
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
Minimum fuel grade
Do not use any gasoline below the mini‐
mum specified fuel grade; otherwise, engine
damage may occur.◀
Use high-quality brands

Field experience has indicated significant differ‐
ences in fuel quality: volatility, composition, ad‐
ditives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale in
the United States and Canada.
Fuels containing up to and including 10 % etha‐
nol or other oxygenates with up to 2.8 % oxygen
by weight, that is, 15 % MTBE or 3 % methanol
plus an equivalent amount of co-solvent, will not
void the applicable warranties with respect to
defects in materials or workmanship.
Mobility
Minimum fuel grade

The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
driveability, starting and stalling problems es‐
pecially under certain environmental conditions
such as high ambient temperature and high al‐
Reference
titude.
223
Wheels and tires
Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressure ▷ Maximum allowable driving speed.
Safety information Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph/

160 km/h
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐
sure influence the following: For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure val‐
▷ The service life of the tires.
ues in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to
▷ Road safety. page 224, and adjust as necessary.
▷ Driving comfort.
Checking the pressure

Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after driving no more
than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours. When the tires
are warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
Regularly check the tire inflation pressure These pressure values can also be found on the
and correct it as needed: at least twice a month tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door
and before a long trip. If you fail to observe this pillar.
precaution, you may be driving on tires with in‐ Maximum permissible speed
correct tire pressures, a condition that may not
Do not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; other‐
only compromise your vehicle's driving stability,
wise, tire damage and accidents may result.◀
but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an
accident.◀
Tire inflation pressure values up to
After correcting the tire inflation pressure, rein‐ 100 mph/160 km/h
itialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
After correcting the tire inflation pressure, rein‐ Tire size Pressure specifications
itialize the Tire Pressure Monitor. in psi/kPa
Specifications in
Pressure specifications
psi/kilopascal with
The tire inflation pressure table, refer to cold tires
page 224, contains all pressure specifications
for the specified tire sizes at the ambient tem‐
perature. Pressure specifications apply to ap‐ 225/55 R 17 97 Y 2.0 / 30 2.3 / xx
proved tire sizes and recommended tire brands.
245/45 R 18 96 Y
This information can be obtained from your
service center. 225/55 R 17 97 H M
+S
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following: 225/55 R 17 97 W 2.3 / 33 2.5 / 36
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle. 245/45 R 18 100
▷ Vehicle load. V M+S XL
224
Tire size Pressure specifications Tire size Pressure specifications
At a glance
in psi/kPa in psi/kPa
F: 245/45 R 18 96 Y 2.0 / 30 - F: 245/40 R 19 94 Y 2.2 / 32 -

R: 275/40 R 18 99 Y - 2.2 / 32 R: 275/35 R 19 96 Y - 2.3 / 33
F: 245/40 R 19 94 Y 2.2 / 32 - F: 245/35 R 20 95 2.4 / 35 -

R: 275/35 R 19 96 Y - 2.3 / 33 Y XL - 2.5 / 36
Controls
R: 275/30 R 20 97
F: 245/35 R 20 95 2.4 / 35 -
Y XL
Y XL - 2.5 / 36
R: 275/30 R 20 97
With full load
Y XL
Tire size Pressure specifications
Driving tips
Tire inflation pressures at max. speeds in psi/kPa
above 100 mph/160 km/h
Specifications in
Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
psi/kilopascal with
In order to drive at maximum speeds in ex‐ cold tires
cess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and,
if necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds
Navigation
exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant 225/55 R 17 97 Y 2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44
table on the following pages. Otherwise tire 245/45 R 18 96 Y
damage and accidents could occur.◀
225/55 R 17 97 H M
+S
Tire inflation pressure values over
100 mph/160 km/h
225/55 R 17 97 W 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 35
245/45 R 18 100
With partial load
V M+S XL
Tire size Pressure specifications F: 245/45 R 18 96 Y 2.5 / 36 -

in psi/kPa R: 275/40 R 18 99 Y - 2.7 / 39
Specifications in F: 245/40 R 19 94 Y 2.6 / 38 -
psi/kilopascal with
R: 275/35 R 19 96 Y - 3.0 / 44
cold tires
F: 245/35 R 20 95 2.8 / 41 -
Y XL - 3.3 / 47
225/55 R 17 97 Y 2.0 / 30 2.3 / 33
R: 275/30 R 20 97
245/45 R 18 96 Y Y XL
225/55 R 17 97 H M
+S
Mobility
225/55 R 17 97 W 2.3 / 33 2.5 / 36 Tire identification marks

245/45 R 18 100
V M+S XL Tire size
255/50 R 19 103 Y
F: 245/45 R 18 96 Y 2.0 / 30 -
255: nominal width in mm
Reference
R: 275/40 R 18 99 Y - 2.2 / 32
225
Treadwear
Wheels and tires 50: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
19: rim diameter in inches based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
103: load rating, not for ZR tires
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as
well on the government course as a tire graded
Speed letter 100. The relative performance of tires depends
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h and may depart significantly from the norm due
to variations in driving habits, service practices
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h and differences in road characteristics and cli‐
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h mate.
Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
Traction
Tire Identification Number The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 3508 AA, A, B, and C.
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
xxx: tire size and tire design
conditions on specified government test surfa‐
3508: tire age ces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the have poor traction performance.
U.S. Department of Transportation. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
Tire age does not include acceleration, cornering, hydro‐
DOT … 3508: the tire was manufactured in the planing, or peak traction characteristics.
35th week in 2008.
Recommendation: regardless of wear, replace Temperature
tires at least every 6 years. The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
Uniform Tire Quality Grading generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
Quality grades can be found where applicable heat when tested under controlled conditions
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus‐
maximum section width. tained high temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA;
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
Temperature A
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must
DOT Quality Grades meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Treadwear Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent
Traction AA A B C higher levels of performance on the laboratory
Temperature A B C test wheel than the minimum required by law.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Temperature grade for this tire
Safety Requirements in addition to these The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
grades. tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
226
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or in Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐
At a glance
combination, can cause heat buildup and pos‐ fects:
sible tire failure. ▷ Unusual vibrations during driving.
If necessary, have the vehicle towed.◀ ▷ Unusual handling such as a strong tendency
to pull to the left or right.
M+S
In case of tire damage
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
If there are indications of tire damage, re‐
weather performance than summer tires.
Controls
duce your speed immediately and have the
wheels and tires checked right away; otherwise,
there is the increased risk of an accident.
Tire tread
Drive carefully to the next service center or tire
Summer tires shop.
Driving tips
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than If necessary, have the vehicle towed.◀
0.12 in/3 mm. Repair of tire damage
There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if For safety reasons, the manufacturer of
the tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm. your vehicle recommends that you do not have
damaged tires repaired; they should be re‐
Winter tires placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐
sult.◀
Navigation
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.16 in/4 mm.
Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are
less suitable for winter operation.
Tire age
Recommendation
Minimum tread depth
regardless of wear, replace tires at least every
6 years.
Manufacture date
On the sidewall:
DOT … 3508: the tire was manufactured in the
35th week in 2008.
Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's Changing wheels and tires
circumference and have the legally required
minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm. Mounting
Information on mounting tires
They are marked on the side of the tire with TWI,
Tread Wear Indicator. Have mounting and balancing performed
Mobility
only by a service center or tire specialist.

If this work is not carried out properly, there is
Tire damage the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.◀
Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign ob‐
jects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Reference
227
Wheel and tire combination Retreaded tires
Wheels and tires
Information on the correct wheel-tire combina‐ The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
tion and rim versions for your vehicle can be ob‐ ommend the use of retreaded tires.
tained from your service center.
Retreaded tires
Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair the
Possibly substantial variations in the de‐
function of a variety of systems such as ABS or
sign and age of the tire casing structures can
DSC.
limit service life and have a negative impact on
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐ road safety.◀
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
figuration from a single manufacturer. Winter tires
Following tire damage, have the original wheel The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
and tire combination remounted on the vehicle winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures
as soon as possible. below +45 ℉/+7 ℃.
Approved wheels and tires Although so-called all-season M+S tires do pro‐
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom‐ vide better winter traction than summer tires,
mends that you use only wheels and tires that they do not provide the same level of perform‐
have been approved for your particular vehicle ance as winter tires.
model.
Maximum speed of winter tires
For example, despite having the same official
size ratings, variations can lead to body contact If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
and with it, the risk of severe accidents. than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then display a corresponding sign in the field of
The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot evalu‐
vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire spe‐
ate non-approved wheels and tires to determine
cialist or from your service center.
if they are suited for use, and therefore cannot
ensure the operating safety of the vehicle if they Maximum speed for winter tires
are mounted.◀ Do not exceed the maximum speed for the
winter tires; otherwise, tire damage and acci‐
Recommended tire brands dents can occur.◀
Rotating wheels between axles

The manufacturer of your vehicle advises
against swapping wheels between the front and
rear axles.
This can impair the handling characteristics.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐ as little exposure to light as possible.
hicle recommends certain tire brands. These
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.
grease and fuels.
With proper use, these tires meet the highest
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
standards for safety and handling.
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
228
Run-flat tires Make sure that the snow chains are always suf‐
At a glance
ficiently tight. Retighten as needed according to
Label the chain manufacturer's instructions.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
Controls
in incorrect readings.
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
Dynamic Traction Control if necessary.
RSC label on the tire sidewall. Maximum speed with snow chains
Driving tips
The wheels are composed of special rims and Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when
tires that are self-supporting, to a limited de‐ using snow chains.
gree.
Snow chain detection*
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to re‐
main drivable to a restricted degree in the event
The concept
of a pressure loss.
When using snow chains, you should set
Navigation
Continued driving with damaged tires, refer to whether you are driving with or without snow
page 92. chains via the iDrive.
The snow chain detection system supports you
Changing run-flat tires
by automatically showing the detected state on
For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No the Control Display.
spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your
When snow chains are in use, the rear axle steer‐
service center will be glad to advise you.
ing of the Integral Active Steering* is deacti‐
vated automatically.
At speeds above the maximum allowable speed
Snow chains
with snow chains of 30 mph/50 km/h, the rear
axle steering is activated again automatically.
Fine-link snow chains
Only certain types of fine-link snow chains have Activating the status
been tested by the manufacturer of your vehicle,
classified as road-safe and recommended. 1. "Settings"
Consult your service center for more informa‐ 2. "Tire chains"

tion. 3. "Tire chains installed"
Use Automatic detection

If functioning properly:
Mobility
Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped

with the same tire size: ▷ Snow chains are mounted. The setting is not
▷ 225/55 R 17 activated .
▷ 245/45 R 18 After you drive a short distance, the mes‐
Follow the chain manufacturer's instructions. sage is shown on the Control Display and the
status is activated automatically.
Reference
229
Wheels and tires Confirm the automatic activation.
▷ Snow chains are not mounted. The setting
is activated .
At speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h, a warning
lamp lights up and a message is displayed.
Deactivate the status manually.
If not functioning properly:
▷ Snow chains are mounted. The setting is not
activated .
A message does not appear on the Control
Display.
The automatic detection system is malfunc‐
tioning. Activate the status manually.
Activating/deactivating rear axle

steering
If the status indicating that snow chains are in
use is activated, the rear axle steering is deacti‐
vated automatically.
At speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h, the rear axle
steering is activated again, even though snow
chains are in use.
230
Engine compartment
At a glance
Important features in the engine compartment
Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
1 Vehicle identification number* 4 Jump starting, positive terminal
2 Jump starting, negative terminal 5 Oil filler neck
3 Washer fluid reservoir 6 Coolant reservoir
Hood 1. Pull the lever.
Opening the hood

Working in the engine compartment
Never attempt to perform any service or
repair operations on your vehicle without the
necessary professional technical training.
If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐
lines, have any work on the vehicle performed
only by a service center.
Mobility
If this work is not carried out properly, there is

the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.◀
Reference
231
Engine compartment 2. Press the release handle and open the hood.
3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.
Danger of injury when the hood is open

There is a danger of injury from protruding
parts when the hood is open.◀
Closing the hood
Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16 in/

40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully.
The hood must audibly engage on both sides.
Hood open when driving

If you see any signs that the hood is not
completely closed while driving, pull over imme‐
diately and close it securely.◀
Danger of pinching
Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
232
Engine oil
At a glance
Checking the oil level Too much engine oil
Have the vehicle checked immedi‐
The concept ately; otherwise, surplus oil can lead to en‐
The oil level is monitored electronically and dis‐ gine damage.◀
played on the Control Display.
Controls
▷ "Measurement inactive. Have this
checked."
Requirements
Note the newly calculated remaining mile‐
▷ The engine must be running and warm after age until the next oil service. Have the sys‐
the vehicle has been driven for at least tem checked as soon as possible.
6 miles/10 km.
Driving tips
▷ The vehicle is stopped or being driven on a
level roadway. Adding engine oil
Displaying the oil level Filler neck
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
Navigation
3. "Engine oil level"
When the indicator lights up in the instrument
cluster, add 1 US quart/liter of engine oil within
the next 125 miles/200 km.
Recommended oil types, refer to page 233

Possible messages
Protect children
▷ "Engine oil level OK"
Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐
▷ "Measurement not possible at this time."
dren and heed the warnings on the containers
Duration with the engine running: ap‐ to prevent health risks.◀
prox. 3 minutes.
Duration while driving: approx. 5 minutes.
▷ "Engine oil level below minimum. Add 1 Oil types
quart!"
Mobility
Note
Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km.
No oil additives
▷ "Engine oil level too high! Have this
checked." Oil additives may lead to engine dam‐
age.◀
Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Reference
233
Approved oil types Coolant level
Engine oil
Your service center can advise you on which en‐ Have your service center check the coolant level
gine oils have been approved by the manufac‐ and add coolant, if necessary.
turer of your vehicle.
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the Disposal
engine. Comply with the relevant environmental
Only use approved BMW High Performance oil. protection regulations when disposing
of coolant and coolant additives.
Approved oils belong to the following viscosity
classes: SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40
and SAE 5W-30.
Alternative oil types

If the approved engine oils are not available, up
to 1 US quart/liter of another oil with the follow‐
ing specification may be used.
API SM specifications or higher
Coolant
General information
Danger of burns from hot engine
Do not open the cooling system while the
engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant may
cause burns.◀
Suitable additives
Only use suitable additives; otherwise, en‐
gine damage may occur. The additives are
harmful to your health.◀
Coolant consists of water and additives.
Not all commercially available additives are suit‐
able for your vehicle. Ask your service center for
suitable additives.
234
Maintenance
At a glance
BMW Maintenance System Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
If this occurs, have a service center update the
Controls
time-dependent maintenance procedures,
such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary,
changing the engine oil and the microfilter/acti‐
vated-charcoal filter.
Driving tips
The system obtains information about the road
safety and operational reliability of the vehicle Service and Warranty
and takes into account aspects such as a timely Information Booklet for US
vehicle check. The aim is to optimize mainte‐ models and Warranty and
nance procedures with a view to reducing the Service Guide Booklet for
cost of running the vehicle.
Canadian models
Navigation
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor‐
Condition Based Service CBS mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐ additional information on service requirements.
count the driving conditions of your vehicle.
Maintenance and repair should be performed by
Based on this, Condition Based Service deter‐
your service center. Make sure to have regular
mines the maintenance requirements.
maintenance procedures recorded in the vehi‐
The system makes it possible to adapt the cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet
amount of maintenance you need to your user for US models, and in the Warranty and Service
profile. Guide Booklet for Canadian models. These en‐
Details on the service requirements, refer to tries are proof of regular maintenance.
page 78, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Service data in the remote control

Information on the required maintenance is con‐
tinuously stored in the remote control. Your
service center will read out this data and suggest
the right array of service procedures for your ve‐
hicle.
Mobility
Therefore, hand your service specialist the re‐

mote control that you used most recently.
Reference
235
Socket for OBD Onboard
Maintenance provide valuable information for service proc‐
esses and repair or for optimizing and develop‐
Diagnostics ing vehicle functions further. In addition, if you
signed a service contract for Assist, certain ve‐
hicle data can be sent directly from the vehicle
to facilitate the desired services.
On the driver's side is an OBD socket for check‐

ing the primary components in the vehicle emis‐
sions.
Emissions values
▷ The warning lamp lights up:
The emissions values are deterio‐
rating. Have the vehicle checked as
soon as possible.
▷ The warning lamp flashes under cer‐
tain circumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive
misfiring in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have
the system checked immediately;
otherwise, serious engine misfiring
within a brief period can seriously
damage emission control compo‐
nents, in particular the catalytic con‐
verter.
Fuel filler cap

The indicator lamp lights up.
If the fuel cap is not properly tightened,
the OBD system may conclude that fuel
vapor is escaping. If the cap is then tightened,
the display should go out in a short time.
Data memory
Your vehicle records data relating to vehicle op‐
eration, faults and user settings. These data are
stored in the remote control and can be read out
with suitable devices, particularly when the ve‐
hicle is serviced. The data obtained in this way
236
Replacing components
At a glance
Tool kit 4. Remove the wiper blade toward one side.
Controls
Driving tips
The tool kit is located in a fold-down cover in the Do not fold down the wipers without wiper
trunk lid. blades
Unscrew the wing nut to open. Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades have
not been installed; this may damage the wind‐
shield.◀
Wiper blade replacement
Navigation
Replacing the wiper blades
Lamp and bulb replacement
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer to General information
page 65, the wiper arms.
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribution
2. Fold up the wipers.
to vehicle safety.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to
your service center if you are unfamiliar with
them or they are not described here.
You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs
at your service center.
Danger of burns
Only change bulbs when they are cool;
3. Position the wiper blade in a horizontal po‐ otherwise, there is the danger of getting
sition. burned.◀
Working on the lighting system
When working on the lighting system, you
should always switch off the lights affected to
Mobility
prevent short circuits.

To avoid possible injury or equipment damage
when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions
provided by the bulb manufacturer.◀
Do not touch the bulbs
Reference
237
Replacing components Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with your Accessing the bulbs
bare hands, as even minute amounts of con‐
tamination will burn into the bulb's surface and
reduce its service life.
Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or
hold the bulb by its base.◀
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)

Light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover
serve as the light source for controls, display el‐
ements and other equipment. Remove the screws and fold down the cap.
These light-emitting diodes, which are related
to conventional lasers, are officially designated Low beams
as Class 1 light-emitting diodes. The illustration shows the left side of the engine
Do not remove the covers compartment.
Do not remove the covers, and never stare 55-watt bulb, H7
into the unfiltered light for several hours; other‐
wise, irritation of the retina could result.◀
Headlamp glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
ternal lamps in cool or humid weather. When the
light is switched on, the condensation evapo‐
rates after a short time. The headlamp glasses
do not need to be changed.
If there is a large amount of moisture, e.g., water Unscrew the cap, remove it, and change the
droplets form in the lamp, have it checked by bulb.
your service center.
Turn signal
Front lamps, bulb replacement
The illustration shows the left side of the engine
compartment.
Halogen headlamps
24-watt bulb, PY
Parking lamps and roadside parking lamps,
additional turn signal lamp
These lights are made using LED technology.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.
Unscrew the cap, remove it, and change the

bulb.
238
High beams If a xenon bulb fails, switch on the front fog lamps
At a glance
The illustration shows the left side of the engine and continue the trip with great care. Comply
compartment. with local regulations.
55-watt bulb, H7 Do not perform work/bulb replacement on
xenon headlamps
1. Fold open the cover in the engine compart‐
ment. Have any work on the xenon lighting system, in‐
cluding bulb replacement, performed only by a
service center.
Controls
Due to the high voltage present in the system,
there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is car‐
ried out improperly.◀
For checking and adjusting headlamp aim,
please contact your BMW center.
Driving tips
Parking lamps and roadside parking lamps,
turn signal lamp
2. Unscrew the cap and remove it.
malfunction.
Navigation
Corner-illuminating lamps
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs.
The illustration shows the left side of the engine
compartment.
3. Unscrew the bulb holder counterclockwise. 55-watt bulb, H7
1. Open the folding cover in the engine com‐

partment.
4. Remove the bulb and replace it.

5. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in
the reverse order.
Mobility
Xenon headlamps*
Because of the long life of these bulbs, the like‐
lihood of failure is very low. Switching the lamps
on and off frequently shortens their life.
Reference
239
Replacing components 2. Turn the cap and remove it. 2. Remove the screws.
3. Unscrew the bulb holder counterclockwise. 3. Pull the lamp out toward the front.
the reverse order.
Tail lamps, bulb replacement
At a glance

the reverse order.
Front fog lamps

bulbs, refer to page 237.
35-watt bulb, H8 1 Turn signal
2 Backup lamp
1. Carefully pull out the grill toward the front.
3 Rear fog lamp*
4 Tail lamp
5 Brake lamp
6 Rear reflector*
Turn signal, brake, tail, and license

plate lamps
bulbs, refer to page 237.
malfunction.
240
Rear fog lamp and backup lamps in the
At a glance
trunk lidBackup lamps in the trunk lid
Accessing the lamps

1. Remove the three screws using the screw
driver from the tool kit.
Controls
Press the bulb into the bulb holder, turn coun‐
terclockwise and remove.
Backup lamp
Driving tips
16-watt bulb, W16W
2. Fold away the cover.
Navigation
Pull out the bulb and replace it.
3. Replace the defective bulb.
Changing wheels
Notes
Your vehicle is equipped with run-flat tires, refer
to page 229, as standard equipment.
They do not need to be replaced immediately in
the event of a puncture.
When mounting new tires or changing from
summer to winter tires or vice versa, use run-flat
tires for your own safety.
Rear fog lamps No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire.
21-watt bulb, H21W The tools for changing wheels are available as
Mobility
accessories from your service center.

Reference
241
Jacking points for the vehicle jack Vehicle battery
Replacing components
Maintenance
The battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the elec‐
trolyte will last for the life of the battery.
Your service center will be glad to advise you on
questions regarding the battery.
Battery replacement
Use approved vehicle batteries only.
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are
Only use vehicle batteries that have been
located in the positions shown.
approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer;
otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and
Lug bolt lock* systems or functions may not be fully availa‐
ble.◀
After a battery replacement, have the battery
registered on the vehicle by your service center
to ensure that all comfort functions are fully
available.
Charging the battery

In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
terminals, refer to page 245, in the engine com‐
The lug bolt lock is found in the tool kit. partment with the engine off.
Power failure
After a temporary power loss, some equipment
needs to be reinitialized.
Individual settings need to be reprogrammed:
▷ Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory:
store the positions again, refer to page 53.
▷ Time: update, refer to page 76.
▷ Date: update, refer to page 76.
▷ Lug bolt, arrow 1.
▷ Radio station: Save again, refer to
▷ Adapter, arrow 2. page 172.
▷ Navigation system: wait for the operability of
Removing the navigation.
1. Attach the adapter to the wheel lug.
2. Unscrew the lug bolt. Disposing of old batteries
Remove the adapter after screwing the lug bolt Have old batteries disposed of by your
back on. service center or take them to a recy‐
cling center.
242
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
At a glance
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
Notes
Controls
Replacing fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a substitute
of another color or amperage rating; this could
lead to a circuit overload, ultimately resulting in
Driving tips
a fire in the vehicle.◀
Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse
types and locations are stored in the fuse box in
the trunk.
In the glove compartment
Navigation
Push the handle up, arrow 1, and open the lid,
arrow 2.
In the trunk
Mobility
Open the cover on the right side trim.
Information on the fuse types and locations is

found on a separate sheet.
Reference
243
Breakdown assistance
Breakdown assistance
Hazard warning flashers After deactivation, an Emergency Request

is no longer possible.
▷ The system can be reactivated by a service
center after you sign a new contract.
Initiating an Emergency Request
The button for the hazard warning flashers is lo‐

cated in the center console.
Emergency Request*
1. Press the cover briefly to open it.
Requirements 2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the
▷ Equipment version with full preparation button lights up.
package mobile phone. ▷ The LED lights up: an Emergency Request
An Emergency Request can be made, even was initiated.
if no mobile phones are paired with the ve‐ If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle
hicle. until the voice connection has been estab‐
▷ BMW Assist is activated, refer to page 216. lished.
▷ The radio ready state is switched on. ▷ The LED flashes if the connection to the
BMW Assist Response Center has been es‐
▷ The BMW Assist system is functional and tablished.
logged into a wireless communications net‐
work. After the Emergency Request arrives at the
BMW Assist Response Center, the BMW
▷ The emergency call system is functional. Assist Response Center contacts you and
Only use Emergency Request in an emergency. takes further steps to help you.
Emergency Request not guaranteed Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW
Assist Response Center can take further
For technical reasons, the Emergency Re‐
steps to help you under certain circumstan‐
quest cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable
ces.
conditions.◀
For this purpose, data that are used to de‐
Service contract termine the necessary rescue measures,
such as the current position of the vehicle if
▷ After your contract with BMW Assist has ex‐
it can be established, are transmitted to the
pired, the BMW Assist system can be deac‐
BMW Assist Response Center.
tivated by the service center without you
having to visit a workshop. ▷ If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist
Response Center cannot be heard on the
hands-free system, the hands-free system
244
may be malfunctioning. However, the BMW Roadside Assistance
At a glance
Assist Response Center may still be able to
hear you. Service availability
Roadside Assistance from the BMW Group pro‐
Initiating an Emergency Request
vides around-the-clock assistance in the event
automatically
of a breakdown, including on weekends and hol‐
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐ idays.
quest is automatically initiated immediately after
Phone numbers of the Response Center of
Controls
a severe accident. Automatic Collision Notifica‐
Roadside Assistance in your home country: re‐
tion is not affected by pressing the button.
fer to the Contact brochure.
Warning triangle* Jump starting
Driving tips
Notes
If the battery is discharged, an engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle and
two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with
fully insulated clamp handles.
To prevent personal injury or damage to both
Navigation
vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
dure.
The warning triangle is located in the container
on the inside of the trunk lid. Do not touch live parts
Unscrew the wing nut to open. To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury,
always avoid all contact with electrical compo‐
nents while the engine is running.◀
First aid kit* Preparation

1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts and approxi‐
mately the same capacity in Ah. This infor‐
mation can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐
cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.
Bodywork contact between vehicles
The first aid kit is located in the container on the
inside of the trunk lid. Make sure that there is no contact be‐
Mobility
tween the bodywork of the two vehicles; other‐

Unscrew the wing nut to open.
wise, there is the danger of short circuits.◀
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents reg‐ Starting aid terminals
ularly and replace any items promptly. Connecting order
Reference
245
Breakdown assistance Connect the jumper cables in the correct order; sponding engine or body ground of the ve‐
otherwise, there is the danger of injury from hicle to be started.
sparking.◀
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and
let it run for several minutes at an increased
idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the other vehicle as usual.
If the first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before making another
attempt in order to allow the discharged bat‐
The so-called starting aid terminal in the engine
tery to recharge.
compartment acts as the battery's positive ter‐
minal. 3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse
order.
Check the battery and recharge if necessary.
Tow-starting and towing

Tow fitting
The body ground or a special nut acts as the

negative terminal.
Connecting the cables

1. Pull off the cap of the BMW starting aid ter‐
minal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
battery, or to the corresponding starting aid
ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the
terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
front or rear of the BMW. It is located in the con‐
3. Attach the other end of the cable to the pos‐ tainer on the inside of the trunk lid.
itive terminal of the battery, or to the corre‐
sponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle Tow fitting, information on use
to be started. ▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative the vehicle and screw it all the way in.
jumper cable to the negative terminal of the ▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads
battery, or to the corresponding engine or only.
body ground of the vehicle providing assis‐ ▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,
tance. do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.
5. Attach the other end of the cable to the neg‐ Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the ve‐
ative terminal of the battery, or to the corre‐ hicle can occur.◀
246
Screw thread Manually release the transmission lock, even if
At a glance
there is no malfunction involving the transmis‐
sion. Otherwise, there is the danger that the
transmission lock will be engaged automatically
during towing.◀
Manual transmission:
Gearshift lever in neutral position.
Controls
Towing*
Observe the notes on towing
Push out the cover by pressing on the arrow Observe all notes on towing or vehicle
symbol. damage or accidents can occur.◀
▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on;
Driving tips
Towing otherwise, the low beams, tail lamps, turn
signals, and windshield wipers may be un‐
General information available.
Light towing vehicle ▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle
The towing vehicle must not be lighter raised, as the front wheels could turn.
than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will ▷ When the engine is stopped, there is no
Navigation
not be possible to control the vehicle re‐ power assist. Consequently, more force
sponse.◀ needs to be applied when braking and steer‐
Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly ing.
Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow ▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐
fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may quired.
cause damage.◀ ▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐
Do not tow when the electronics system pending on local regulations.
has failed. ▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly
Do not tow the vehicle when the electronics sys‐ identify the vehicle being towed by placing
tem has failed; otherwise, the electric steering a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐
lock cannot be unlocked and the vehicle cannot dow.
be steered.◀ Adhere to the towing speed and distance
Do not exceed a towing speed of 30 mph/
Observe before towing
50 km/h and a towing distance of 30 miles/50 km
The parking brake is blocked or damage to the transmission can occur.◀
The parking brake cannot be released
manually. Towing methods
When the parking brake is blocked, do not tow Do not lift the vehicle
with the front axle lifted or the vehicle can be Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
Mobility
damaged. body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may

Contact your service center.◀ result.◀
transmission*: Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
Manually release the transmission lock
side on both vehicles.
Reference
247
Tow-starting
Breakdown assistance Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
the following: Automatic transmission/Sports
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited during cor‐ automatic transmission*
nering. Due to the automatic transmission, the engine
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it cannot be started by tow-starting.
is secured with an offset. Have the cause of the starting difficulties rem‐
edied.
Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that Manual transmission
the tow rope is taut. If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but start
To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on the engine by jump-starting, refer to page 245.
the vehicle components when towing, always If the vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con‐
use nylon ropes or nylon straps. verter, only tow-start while the engine is cold.
Attaching the tow rope correctly 1. Switch on the hazard warning flashers and
comply with local regulations.
Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit‐
ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is se‐ 2. Ignition, refer to page 60, on.
cured on other parts of the vehicle.◀ 3. Engage third gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch
Tow truck pressed and slowly release the clutch. After
the engine starts, immediately press on the
clutch again.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope, and switch off the hazard warn‐
ing flashers.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
Have your vehicle transported with a tow truck

with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
Do not lift the vehicle.

Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may
result.◀
Secure the vehicle against rolling off.
Apply the parking brake after towing and
secure the vehicle against rolling off if neces‐
sary.
Have the operability of transmission position P
checked by the service center.◀
248
Care
At a glance
Car washes ▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to
page 64, to avoid unintentional wiper acti‐
Notes vation.
Steam jets or high-pressure washers Guide rails in car washes
Avoid car washes with guide rails higher
Controls
When using steam jets or high-pressure
washers, hold them a sufficient distance away than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body
and use a maximum temperature of 140 ℉/ could be damaged.◀
60 ℃.
Before driving into a car wash
Holding them too close or using excessively
high pressures or temperatures can cause dam‐ The vehicle is able to roll when the following
Driving tips
age or preliminary damage that may then lead to steps are taken:
long-term damage. Manual transmission:
Follow the operating instructions for the high- 1. Shift to neutral.
pressure washer.◀
2. Release the parking brake, refer to
Cleaning sensors/cameras with high- page 62, or deactivate Automatic Hold, refer
pressure washers to page 62.
Navigation
When using high-pressure washers, do not 3. Switch the engine off.
spray the exterior sensors and cameras, e.g.,
Park Distance Control*, for extended periods of
transmission*:
time and only from a distance of at least 12 in/
30 cm.◀ 1. Press on the brake pedal.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in win‐ 2. Engage transmission position N.
ter.
3. Release the parking brake, refer to
Intense soiling and road salt can damage the ve‐ page 62, or deactivate Automatic Hold, refer
hicle. to page 63.
4. Switch the engine off.
Washing in automatic car washes
Your vehicle can be washed in automatic car Transmission position P with the igni‐
washes right from the start. tion off
Give preference to cloth car washes or those When the ignition is switched off, position P
that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint is engaged automatically. When in an auto‐
damage. matic car wash, for example, ensure that the
ignition is not switched off accidentally.◀
Notes The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside
Note the following: when in transmission position N.
Mobility
▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not A signal is sounded when an attempt is made to
damaged by the transport mechanisms. lock the vehicle.
▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they

Transmission position
may be damaged, depending on the width of
the vehicle. Transmission position P is engaged automati‐
cally:
Reference
249
Care ▷ When the ignition is switched off. Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
▷ After approx. 15 minutes. chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
wear and premature degradation of the leather
Headlamps surface.
▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or To guard against discoloration, such as from
caustic cleansers. clothing, provide leather care roughly every two
months.
▷ Soak areas that have been soiled e.g. due to
insects, with shampoo and wash off with Clean light-colored leather more frequently as
water. dust and dirt are more noticeable.
▷ Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
ice scraper. grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.
After washing the vehicle Suitable care products are available from the
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes service center.
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can
be reduced and corrosion of the brake discs can Upholstery material care
occur. Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.
If they are very dirty, e.g., beverage stains, use a
soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suitable
Vehicle care interior cleaner.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
Car care products large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma‐
BMW recommends using cleaning and care terial vigorously.
products from BMW, since these have been
tested and approved. Damage from Velcro® fasteners
Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or other
Car care and cleaning products
articles of clothing can damage the seat covers.
Follow the instructions on the container. Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.◀
When cleaning the interior, open the doors or
windows. Caring for special components
Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐
cles. Light-alloy wheels
Use wheel cleaner, particularly during the winter
Cleansers can contain substances that are dan‐
months. Do not use aggressive, acidic, strongly
gerous and harmful to your health.◀
alkaline or abrasive cleaners, or steam jets
above 140 ℉/60 ℃; follow the manufacturer's
Vehicle paint
instructions.
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention. Chrome surfaces*
Environmental influences can act on the vehicle Carefully clean components such as the radiator
paint. Tailor the frequency and extent of your car grille or door handles with an ample supply of
care to these influences. water, possibly with shampoo added, particu‐
larly when they have been exposed to road salt.
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather often, using a
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
250
Rubber components If they are very dirty, clean with a microfiber cloth
At a glance
Aside from water, treat only with rubber cleans‐ and water or an interior cleaner. To prevent mat‐
ers. ting of the carpet, rub back and forth in the di‐
rection of travel only.
When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any sil‐
icon-containing car care products in order to
Sensors/cameras
avoid damage or reduced noise damping.
To clean the sensors or cameras of equipment
Fine wood parts* such as the High-beam Assistant*, Active
Controls
Cruise Control* or Night Vision*, use a cloth
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
moistened with a small amount of glass cleaner.
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft
cloth.
Displays/screens
Plastic components Use a microfiber cloth to clean the Control Dis‐
play or the Head-up Display*.
Driving tips
These include:
▷ Headliner. Cleaning displays
▷ Lamp lenses. Do not use chemical or household cleans‐

ers.
▷ Instrument cluster cover.
Keep all fluids and moisture away from the unit.
▷ Matte black spray-coated components.
Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfa‐
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Navigation
ces or electrical components.
Moisten the cloth lightly and use plastic
Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do
cleanser, if necessary.
not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage
Do not soak the headliner. can result.◀
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol
or solvents Long-term vehicle storage
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐ Your service center can advise you on what to
vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty consider when storing the vehicle for longer
grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead to than three months.
surface damage.◀
Safety belts
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Chemical cleaning
Do not clean chemically; this can destroy
the webbing.◀
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
belts clipped into their buckles.
Mobility
Do not allow the reels to retract the safety belts

until they are dry.
Carpets and floor mats*

Floor mats can be removed from the passenger
Reference
compartment for cleaning.
251
252
Reference
This chapter contains technical data, short
commands for the voice activation system, and an
index that will quickly take you to the information
you need.
253
Technical data
Technical data
Dimensions
Width, height
1 Vehicle height: 57.6 inches/1,464 mm

2 Vehicle width without exterior mirrors:
73.2 inches/1,860 mm
3 Vehicle width with exterior mirrors: 82.4 in‐
ches/2,094 mm
254
Length, wheel base
At a glance
Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
1 Wheel base: 116.9 inches/2,968 mm
2 Length: 192.9 inches/4,899 mm
Smallest turning circle
Ø: 39 ft 4 in/12 m
Engine specifications
The rated power outputs are established on the
basis of fuel grade AKI 91.
535i
Displacement cu in/cm³ 181.7/2,979
No. of cylinders 6
Maximum output hp 300

at engine speed rpm 5,800
Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 300/407

Mobility
at engine speed rpm 1,200–5,000

Reference
255
Technical data 550i
Displacement cu in/cm³ 268.2/4,395
No. of cylinders 8
Maximum output hp 400

at engine speed rpm 5,500-6,400
Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 450/610

at engine speed rpm 1,750-4,500
Weights
535i/535iA
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs 5,159/5,181

kg 2,340/2,350
Load lbs/kg 1,058/480
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,491/1,130
Approved rear axle load lbs 2,866/2,888

kg 1,300/1,310
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100
Trunk capacity cu ft/l 18.36/520
550i/550iA
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,401/2,450
Load lbs/kg 992/450
Approved front axle load lbs 2,712/2,734

kg 1,230/1,240
Approved rear axle load lbs 2,932/2,943

kg 1,330/1,335
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100
Trunk capacity cu ft/l 18.36/520
256
Capacities
At a glance
Notes
Fuel tank US gal/liters approx. 18.5/70 Fuel quality, refer

to page 223
Windshield and headlamp US quarts/liters approx. 5.3/5.0

washer system
Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
Mobility
Reference
257
Short commands for voice activation
Short commands for voice activation system
system
General information To have the available spoken instructions read
out loud: ›Voice commands‹
Instructions for voice activation system, refer to
page 25.
Useful short commands

Function Command
Owner's Manual ›Owner's Manual‹
Opening the music collection ›Music collection‹
Opening the tone settings ›Tone‹
Opening the settings ›Settings‹
Opening the profiles ›Profiles‹
Opening the computer ›Onboard info‹
Opening the contacts ›Contacts‹
Displaying the phone book ›Phonebook‹
Opening BMW Assist ›B M W Assist‹
Opening the destination input ›Enter address‹
CD/multimedia*
CD/DVD drive
Function Command
Playing back a CD ›C D on‹
Selecting a CD ›Select C D‹
Selecting a CD and track ›C D ... track ... ‹ e.g., CD 3 track 5
Selecting a track ›C D track ... ‹ e.g., track 5
Opening the CD and multimedia menu ›C D and multimedia‹
258
Function Command
At a glance
CD and DVD ›C D‹
Displaying entertainment details on the split screen ›Entertainment details‹
Music collection
Function Command
Controls
Calling up the current playback ›Current playback‹
Opening the music collection ›Music collection‹
Playing the music collection ›Music collection on‹
Driving tips
Searching for music; opening the menu ›Music search‹
Playing back the most frequently played tracks ›Top fifty‹
External devices
Function Command
Navigation
Opening external devices ›External devices‹
Call up Bluetooth devices ›Bluetooth‹
AUX front ›AUX front‹
Tone
Function Command
Opening the tone settings ›Tone‹
Radio
FM
Function Command
Calling up the radio ›Radio‹

Mobility
Calling up an FM station ›F M‹
Opening manual search ›Manual‹

Reference
259
Short commands for voice activation system Function Command
Calling up a frequency ›Frequency ... megahertz‹ e.g.,

93.5 megahertz or frequency 93.5
Selecting the frequency range ›Select frequency‹
AM
Function Command
Calling up an AM station ›A M‹
Opening manual search ›Manual‹
Calling up a frequency ›Frequency ... Kilohertz‹ e.g., fre‐

quency 753 or 753 kilohertz
Weather Band
Function Command
Calling up the Weather Band ›Weather band‹
Switching on the Weather Band ›Weather band on‹
Selecting a Weather Band station ›Select a weather channel‹
Satellite radio
Function Command
Calling up the satellite radio ›Satellite radio‹
Switching on the satellite radio ›Satellite radio on‹
Selecting a satellite radio channel ›Select satellite radio‹ e.g., satellite

radio channel 2
Stored stations
Function Command
Opening the stored stations ›Presets‹
Choosing a stored station ›Select preset‹
Selecting a stored station ›Preset ... ‹ e.g., stored station 2
260
Telephone*
At a glance
Function Command
Opening the Telephone menu ›Telephone‹
Displaying the phone book ›Phonebook‹
Redialing ›Redial‹
Controls
Displaying accepted calls ›Received calls‹
Dialing a phone number ›Dial number‹
List of messages ›Messages‹
Call up Bluetooth devices ›Bluetooth‹
Driving tips
Navigation*
General information
Navigation
Function Command
Navigation menu ›Navigation‹
Opening the destination input ›Enter address‹
Entering the address ›Enter address‹
Opening destination guidance ›Guidance‹
Starting destination guidance ›Start guidance‹
Terminating destination guidance ›Stop guidance‹
Opening the home address ›Home address‹
Opening the route criteria ›Route preference‹
Opening the route ›Route information‹
Switching on the spoken instructions ›Switch on voice instructions‹
Repeating a spoken instruction ›Repeat voice instructions‹
Switching off the spoken instructions ›Switch off voice instructions‹

Mobility
Displaying the address book ›Address book‹
Displaying the last destinations ›Last destinations‹
Opening the traffic bulletins ›Traffic Info‹
Special destinations ›Points of interest‹

Reference
261
Map
Function Command
Displaying the map ›Map‹
Map facing north ›Map facing north‹
Map in the direction of travel ›Map in direction of travel‹
Perspective map ›Map perspective view‹
Automatic scaling of the map ›Map with automatic scaling‹
Scale...feet ›Map scale ... feet‹
Scale...miles ›Map scale ... miles‹ e.g., map scale

5 miles
Split screen settings
Function Command
Split screen ›Switch on splitscreen‹
Switching off the split screen ›Turn off split screen‹
Adapting the split screen ›Split screen content‹
Split screen, map facing north ›Split screen map facing north‹
Split screen, current position ›Split screen current position‹
Split screen, direction of travel ›Split screen map in direction of

travel‹
Split screen, perspective ›Split screen perspective‹
Split screen, wider intersection zoom ›Splitscreen Exit ramp view‹
Split screen scale...feet ›Split screen scale ... feet‹ e.g., split
screen scale 100 feet
Split screen scale...miles ›Split screen scale ... miles‹ e.g., split
screen scale 5 miles
Split screen, highlighting traffic bulletins ›Split screen, Traffic conditions‹
Split screen, computer ›Split screen on board info‹
Split screen, trip computer ›Splitscreen trip computer‹
Automatically scaling the split screen ›Split screen automatic scaling‹
262
Destination guidance with intermediate destinations
At a glance
Function Command
New destination entry ›Enter address‹
Trip list ›Stored trips‹
Controls
Contacts*
Function Command
My contacts ›My contacts‹
Driving tips
Opening the contacts ›Contacts‹
New contact ›New contact‹
BMW Assist*
Navigation
Function Command
Opening BMW Assist ›B M W Assist‹
Opening BMW Search ›B M W Search‹
Vehicle information
Owner's Manual
Function Command
Opening the Owner's Manual ›Display Owner's Manual‹
Opening the Quick Reference ›Quick reference‹
Opening the keyword search ›Owner's Manual‹
Opening Search by pictures ›Search by pictures‹
Computer
Mobility
Function Command
Opening the computer ›Onboard info‹
Opening the trip computer ›Trip computer‹

Reference
263
Vehicle
Function Command
Opening the vehicle information ›Vehicle info‹
Opening the vehicle status ›Vehicle status‹
Adjusting
Vehicle
Function Command
Opening the main menu ›Main menu‹
Opening the settings ›Settings‹
Opening the options ›Options‹
Info display of the instrument cluster ›Info Display‹
Central display settings ›Control display‹
Opening the time and date settings ›Time and date‹
Opening the language and unit settings ›Language and units‹
Opening the speed limit settings ›Speed‹
Opening the light settings ›Lighting‹
Opening the door lock settings ›Door locks‹
Opening the profiles ›Profiles‹
Equipment*
Function Command
Opening the air conditioning settings ›Climate‹
Opening the Head-up Display settings ›head up display‹
Enabling the rear seat ›Allow rear control‹
264
265
Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
A ALL program, automatic cli‐ Automatic Soft Closing,
mate control 128 doors 38
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐ All-season tires, refer to Win‐ Automatic transmission with
tem 96 ter tires 228 Steptronic 66
ACC Active Cruise Control Alternating-code hand-held Automatic trunk lid 39
with Stop & Go 102 transmitter 133 AUTO program, automatic cli‐
Accessories and parts 7 Alternative oil types 233 mate control 127
Activated-charcoal filter 128 AM/FM station 172 AUTO program, intensity 127
Active Blind Spot Detec‐ Announcement, navigation, AUX-IN port 190
tion 94 refer to Spoken instruc‐ Axle loads, weights 256
Active Cruise Control with tions 161
Stop & Go, ACC 102 Antifreeze, washer fluid 66 B
Active seat, front 48 Antilock Brake System,
Active seat ventilation, ABS 96 Backrest curvature, refer to
front 49 Anti-slip control, refer to Lumbar support 48
Active Steering, integral 98 DSC 96 Backrest, seats 46
Adaptive brake assistant 96 Approved engine oils 233 Backrest width 48
Adaptive brake lights, refer to Armrest, refer to Center arm‐ Backup camera 113
Brake force display 95 rest 139 Backup lamps, bulb replace‐
Adaptive light control 82 Ashtray 134 ment 241
Additives, oil 233 Ashtray, front 134 Balance 170
Adjustments, seats/head re‐ Ashtray, rear 135 Band-aids, refer to First aid
straints 46 Assist 214 kit 245
After washing vehicle 250 Assistance, Roadside Assis‐ Bar for tow-starting/tow‐
Airbags 86 tance 245 ing 247
Air circulation, refer to Recir‐ Assistance when driving Bass 170
culated-air mode 127 off 100 Battery replacement, remote
Air distribution, manual 126 Audio playback 179 control, rear entertain‐
Air drying, refer to Cooling AUTO intensity 127 ment 195
function 128 Automatic car wash 249 Battery replacement, vehicle
Air pressure, tires 224 Automatic climate con‐ battery 242
Air vents, refer to Ventila‐ trol 126 Battery replacement, vehicle
tion 129 Automatic Cruise Control with remote control 32
Air volume, automatic climate Stop & Go 102 Battery, vehicle 242
control 127 Automatic Curb Monitor 54 Before entering the car
Alarm system 41 Automatic deactivation, front wash 249
Alarm, unintentional 42 passenger airbags 87 Belts, safety belts 49
All around the center con‐ Automatic headlamp con‐ Beverage holder, cu‐
sole 17 trol 82 pholder 140
All around the headliner 18 Automatic Hold 62 Blinds, sun protection 44
All around the steering Automatic locking 38 Bluetooth connection, activat‐
wheel 12 Automatic recirculated-air ing/deactivating 203
control 127 BMW Assist 214
266
BMW EfficientDynamics, refer Cargo straps, securing Closing/opening with remote
At a glance
to Saving fuel 148 cargo 147 control 35
BMW homepage 6 Car key, refer to Remote con‐ Clothes hooks 141
BMW Internet page 6 trol 32 Collision warning, iBrake 107
BMW Maintenance Sys‐ Carpet, care 251 Combination instrument 14
tem 235 Car wash 249 Combination instrument, elec‐
BMW Search 216 Catalytic converter, refer to tronic displays 16
Bottle holder, refer to Cu‐ Hot exhaust system 144 Combination switch, refer to
pholder 140 Category details, special des‐ Turn signals 63
Controls
Brake assistant 96 tinations 155 Combination switch, refer to
Brake assistant, adaptive 96 CBS Condition Based Serv‐ Wiper system 64
Brake discs, breaking in 144 ice 235 Comfort Access 40
Brake force display 95 CD/DVD 179 COMFORT program, Dynamic
Brake lamps, brake force dis‐ CD/DVD player, rear 194 Driving Control 100
Driving tips
play 95 CDs, storing 185 Computer 74
Brake lamps, bulb replace‐ Cell phone 202 Concierge service 215
ment 240 Center armrest 139 Condensation on win‐
Brake lights, adaptive 95 Center console 17 dows 127
Brake pads, breaking in 144 Central locking system 35 Condensation under the vehi‐
Braking, notes 145 Central screen, refer to Control cle 146
Breakdown assis‐ Display 19 Condition Based Service
Navigation
tance 244, 245 Changes, technical, refer to CBS 235
Breaking in 144 Safety 6 Confirmation signal 36
Brightness of Control Dis‐ Changing parts 237 Contacts 211
play 78 Changing wheels/tires 227 Control Display 19
Bulb replacement 237 Check Control 79 Control Display, care 251
Bulb replacement, front 238 Children, seating position 57 Control Display, settings 76
Bulb replacement, rear 240 Children, transporting Controller 19
Bulbs and lamps 237 safely 57 Control systems, driving sta‐
Button, Start/Stop 60 Child restraint fixing sys‐ bility 96
Bypassing, see starting tem 57 Convenient opening 36
aid 245 Child restraint fixing system Convenient operation 37
LATCH 58 Coolant 234
C Child restraint fixing systems, Coolant temperature 72
mounting 57 Cooling function 128
California Proposition 65 Child-safety locks 59 Cooling, maximum 127
Warning 7 Child seat, mounting 57 Cooling system 234
Camera, backup camera 115 Child seats 57 Corrosion on brake discs 146
Camera, care 251 Chrome parts, care 250 Cruise control 109
Camera, Side View 118 Cigarette lighter 134 Cruise control, active with
Camera, Top View 117 Climate control 126 stop-and-go 102
Can holder, refer to Cu‐ Climate control wind‐ Cruising range 73
Mobility
pholder 140 shield 145 Cupholder 140

Car battery 242 Clock 72 Curb weight 256
Car care products 250 Closing/opening from in‐ Current fuel consumption 72
Care, vehicle 250 side 38 Current location, storing 154
Cargo 146 Closing/opening via door Customer Relations 217
lock 37
Reference
267
D
Everything from A to Z Driving stability control sys‐ Emergency unlocking, trunk
tems 96 lid 40
Damage, tires 227 Driving tips 144 Energy Control 72
Damping Control, dynamic 97 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ Energy regeneration 73
Data, technical 254 trol 96 Engine compartment 231
Date 72 DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐ Engine compartment, working
Daytime running lights 82 trol 97 in 231
Defrosting, refer to Windows, DVD/CD 179 Engine coolant 234
defrosting 127 DVD/CD notes 184 Engine oil 233
Destination guidance 159 DVD/CD player, rear 194 Engine oil, adding 233
Destination guidance with in‐ DVD changer 183 Engine oil additives 233
termediate destinations 158 DVD settings 182 Engine oil filler neck 233
Destination input, naviga‐ DVDs, storing 185 Engine oil temperature 72
tion 152 DVD, video 181 Engine oil types, alterna‐
Detour, selecting 165 Dynamic Damping Control 97 tive 233
Digital clock 72 Dynamic destination guid‐ Engine oil types, ap‐
Digital radio 173 ance 160 proved 233
Dimensions 254 Dynamic Drive 97 Engine specifications 255
Dimmable mirrors 55 Dynamic Driving Control 98 Engine start during malfunc‐
Direction indicator, refer to Dynamic Stability Control tion 33
Turn signals 63 DSC 96 Engine start, Help 245
Displacement, engine 255 Dynamic Traction Control Engine start, refer to Starting
Display, instrument clus‐ DTC 97 the engine 60
ter 71 Engine stop 61
Display in windshield 124 E Engine temperature 72
Display lighting, refer to Instru‐ Equalizer 170
ment lighting 84 EfficientDynamics, refer to Equipment, interior 132
Displays 14 Saving fuel 148 ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐
Displays, care 251 Electronic displays, instru‐ gram, refer to DSC 96
Disposal, coolant 234 ment cluster 16 Exchanging wheels/tires 227
Disposal, vehicle battery 242 Electronic engine oil level Exhaust system 144
Distance control, refer to check 233 Exterior mirrors 54
PDC 111 Electronic Stability Program External devices 190
Distance, selecting for ESP, refer to DSC 96 External start 245
ACC 103 Emergency detection, remote External temperature dis‐
Divided screen view, split control 33 play 71
screen 23 Emergency release, door External temperature warn‐
Door lock, refer to Remote lock 38 ing 71
control 32 Emergency release, fuel filler Eyes for securing cargo 147
Doors, Automatic Soft Clos‐ flap 222
ing 38 Emergency release, transmis‐ F
Drive-off assistant 100 sion lock 68
Drive-off assistant, refer to Emergency Request 244 Fader 170
DSC 96 Emergency service, refer to Failure message, refer to
Driving instructions, breaking Roadside Assistance 245 Check Control 79
in 144 Emergency start function, en‐ False alarm, refer to Uninten‐
Driving notes, general 144 gine start 33 tional alarm 42
Fan, refer to Air volume 127
268
Fault displays, refer to Check General driving notes 144 Holder for beverages 140
At a glance
Control 79 Glass sunroof, powered 44 Homepage 6
Filler neck for engine oil 233 Glove compartment 138 Hood 231
Fine wood, care 251 GPS navigation, refer to Navi‐ Horn 12
First aid kit 245 gation system 152 Hotel function, trunk lid 40
Fitting for towing, refer to Tow Gross vehicle weight, ap‐ Hot exhaust system 144
fitting 246 proved 256 House number, entering for
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 91 Gross weight, permissible for navigation 153
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor trailer towing 256 HUD, Head-up Display 124
Controls
TPM 88 Hydroplaning 145
Flat tire, warning lamp 89, 91 H
Flat tire, wheel change 241 I
Flooding 145 Hand brake, refer to Parking
Floor carpet, care 251 brake 62 iBrake, collision warning 107
Driving tips
Floor mats, care 251 Hand-held transmitter, alter‐ Ice warning, refer to External
FM/AM station 172 nating code 133 temperature warning 71
Fold-out position, windshield Hazard warning flashers 244 Icy roads, refer to External
wipers 65 HD Radio 173 temperature warning 71
Foot brake 145 Head airbags 86 Identification marks, tires 225
Front airbags 86 Headlamp control, auto‐ Identification number, refer to
Front fog lamps 84 matic 82 Engine compartment 231
Navigation
Front fog lamps, front, bulb re‐ Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐ iDrive 19
placement 240 ture 81 Ignition key, refer to Remote
Front lamps 238 Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐ control 32
Front passenger airbags, au‐ ture via remote control 36 Ignition off 60
tomatic deactivation 87 Headlamp flasher 64 Ignition on 60
Front passenger airbags, indi‐ Headlamp glass 238 Indication of a flat tire 89, 91
cator lamp 88 Headlamps 238 Indicator and warning mes‐
Front seats, adjusting 46 Headlamps, care 250 sages 14
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 91 Headlamp washer system 64 Indicator lamps 14
Fuel cap 222 Headliner 18 Individual air distribution 126
Fuel consumption, current 72 Headphones, rear entertain‐ Individual settings, refer to
Fuel filler flap 222 ment 197 Personal Profile 33
Fuel gauge 73 Head restraints 46 Inflation pressure monitor,
Fuel quality 223 Head restraints, front 50 tires 88
Fuel, tank capacity 257 Head restraints, rear 52 Inflation pressure, tires 224
Fuse 243 Head-up Display 124 Inflation pressure warning,
Head-up Display, care 251 tires 91
G Heavy cargo, stowing 147 Info display 71
Height, seats 46 Information on navigation
Garage door opener, refer to Height, vehicle 254 data 165
Integrated universal remote High-beam assistant 83 Initialization, Integral Active
Mobility
control 132 High beams 64 Steering 98

Gas station recommenda‐ High beams/low beams, refer Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
tion 161 to High-beam assistant 83 FTM 91
Gear change, automatic trans‐ Hills 145 Initializing, Tire Pressure Mon‐
mission 67 Hill start assistant, refer to itor TPM 89
Gear shift indicator 76 Drive-off assistant 100 Instrument cluster 14, 71
Reference
269
L
Everything from A to Z Instrument cluster, electronic Low beams 81
displays 16 Low beams, automatic, refer to
Instrument lighting 84 Lamp replacement 237 High-beam assistant 83
Integral Active Steering 98 Lamp replacement, front 238 Lower back support 48
Integrated key 32 Lamp replacement, rear 240 Lug bolt lock 242
Integrated universal remote Lamps 81 Luggage compartment lid 38
control 132 Lamps and bulbs 237 Luggage rack, refer to Roof-
Intensity, AUTO program 127 Lane departure warning 93 mounted luggage rack 147
Interactive map 157 Lane margin, warning 93 Lumbar support 48
Interior equipment 132 Language on Control Dis‐
Interior lamps 84 play 77 M
Interior lamps via remote con‐ Lashing eyes, securing
trol 36 cargo 147 Maintenance 235
Interior motion sensor 42 LATCH child restraint fixing Maintenance require‐
Interior rearview and exterior system 58 ments 235
mirrors, automatic dimming Leather, care 250 Maintenance, service require‐
feature 55 LEDs, light-emitting di‐ ments 78
Interior rearview mirror 55 odes 238 Maintenance system,
Intermediate destina‐ Length, vehicle 255 BMW 235
tions 158 Letters and numbers, enter‐ Malfunction displays, refer to
Internet page 6 ing 24 Check Control 79
Intersection, entering for navi‐ License plate lamp, bulb re‐ Manual air distribution 126
gation 153 placement 240 Manual air volume 127
Interval display, service re‐ Light-alloy wheels, care 250 Manual brake, refer to Parking
quirements 78 Light control 82 brake 62
iPod/iPhone 191 Light-emitting diodes, Manual mode, transmis‐
LEDs 238 sion 67
J Lighter, front 134 Manual mode, transmission
Lighter, rear 135 lock 68
Jacking points for the vehicle Lighting 81 Manual operation, backup
jack 242 Lighting via remote con‐ camera 114
Jack, refer to Vehicle trol 36 Manual operation, door
jack 242 Light switch 81 lock 38
Joystick, automatic transmis‐ Load 147 Manual operation, exterior mir‐
sion 67 Loading 146 rors 54
Lock, door 37 Manual operation, fuel filler
K Locking/unlocking from in‐ flap 222
side 38 Manual operation, Park Dis‐
Key/remote control 32 Locking/unlocking via door tance Control PDC 112
Keyless Go, refer to Comfort lock 37 Manual operation, Side
Access 40 Locking/unlocking with re‐ View 117
Key Memory, refer to Personal mote control 35 Manual operation, Top
Profile 33 Locking, automatic 38 View 116
Kickdown, automatic trans‐ Locking, central 35 Manual transmission 66
mission 67 Locking via trunk lid 39 Map, destination entry 156
Knee airbag 86 Lock, power window 44 Map in split screen 162
Locks, doors, and win‐ Map view 162
dows 59
270
Marking on approved Neck restraints, rear, refer to Overheating of engine, refer to
At a glance
tires 228 Head restraints 52 Coolant temperature 72
Marking, run-flat tires 229 New wheels and tires 227
Massage seat, front 48 Night Vision with pedestrian P
Master key, refer to Remote detection 121
control 32 NORMAL program, Dynamic Paint, vehicle 250
Maximum cooling 127 Driving Control 100 Pairing, mobile phone 202
Maximum speed, winter Notes 6 Panic mode 36
tires 228 Number of cylinders, en‐ Parallel parking assistant 118
Controls
Measure, units of 77 gine 255 Park Distance Control
Medical kit 245 Nylon rope for tow-starting/ PDC 111
Memory for seat, mirrors, towing 248 Parked-car ventilation 131
steering wheel 53 Parked vehicle, condensa‐
Menu in instrument clus‐ O tion 146
Driving tips
ter 73 Parking aid, refer to PDC 111
Menus, operating, iDrive 19 OBD Onboard Diagnos‐ Parking assistant 118
Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐ tics 236 Parking brake 62
ing concept 20 Obstacle marking, backup Parking lamps 81
Message list, traffic bulle‐ camera 115 Parking with Auto Hold 62
tins 163 Odometer 71 Parts and accessories 7
Microfilter 128 Oil 233 Passenger side mirror, tilting
Navigation
Minimum tread, tires 227 Oil, adding 233 downward 54
Mirror 54 Oil additives 233 Pathway lines, backup cam‐
Mirror memory 53 Oil change interval, service re‐ era 114
Mobile communication devi‐ quirements 78 PDC Park Distance Con‐
ces in the vehicle 145 Oil filler neck 233 trol 111
Mobile phone 202 Oil level check 233 Pedestrian detection, refer to
Modifications, technical, refer Oil types, alternative 233 Night Vision 121
to Safety 6 Oil types, approved 233 People detection, refer to
Moisture in headlamp 238 Old batteries, disposal 242 Night Vision 121
Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐ Onboard computer, refer to Permissible axle load 256
play 19 Computer 74 Personal Profile 33
Mounting of child restraint fix‐ Onboard Diagnostics Pinch protection system, glass
ing systems 57 OBD 236 sunroof 45
MP3 player 190 Onboard monitor, refer to Pinch protection system, win‐
Multifunction steering wheel, Control Display 19 dows 43
buttons 12 Opening/closing from in‐ Plastic, care 251
Multimedia 179 side 38 Position, storing 154
Music collection 185 Opening/closing via door Postal code, entering in navi‐
Music search 187 lock 37 gation 153
Music, storing 185 Opening/closing with remote Power failure 242
control 35 Power output, engine 255
Mobility
N Operating concept, iDrive 19 Power sunroof, glass 44

Outside air, refer to Automatic Power windows 43
Navigation 152 recirculated-air control 127 Pressure monitor, tires 88
Navigation data 165 Outside temperature warn‐ Pressure, tire air pres‐
Neck restraints, front, refer to ing 71 sure 224
Head restraints 50 Pressure warning, tires 91
Reference
271
Everything from A to Z Profile, refer to Personal Pro‐ Reporting safety defects 8 Screen, refer to Control Dis‐
file 33 Reserve warning, refer to play 19
Programmable memory but‐ Range 73 Screw driver 237
tons, iDrive 23 Resetting, Tire Pressure Mon‐ Screw thread for tow fit‐
Protective function, glass sun‐ itor TPM 89 ting 247
roof 45 Residual heat, automatic Search, refer to BMW
Protective function, win‐ climate control 128 Search 216
dows 43 Retaining straps, securing Seat belts, refer to Safety
Push-and-turn switch, refer to cargo 147 belts 49
Controller 19 Retreaded tires 228 Seat heating, front 48
Road, avoiding 160 Seat heating, rear 49
R Road detour 160 Seating position for chil‐
Roadside Assistance 215 dren 57
Radiator fluid 234 Roadside parking lamps 82 Seat, mirror, and steering
Radio 172 Roller sunblinds 44 wheel memory 53
Radio-operated key, refer to Roll stabilization, refer to Dy‐ Seats 46
Remote control 32 namic Drive 97 Seat ventilation, front 49
Radio ready state 60 Roof load capacity 256 Selection list in instrument
Rain sensor 64 Roof-mounted luggage cluster 73
Random 180 rack 147 Selector lever, automatic
Random playback 180 Rope for tow-starting/tow‐ transmission 67
RDS 173 ing 248 Sensors, care 251
Rear automatic climate con‐ Route 160 Service and warranty 7
trol 130 Route criteria, route 160 Service requirements, CBS
Rear axle steering 98 Route, displaying 160 Condition Based Serv‐
Rear entertainment 194 Route section, bypassing 161 ice 235
Rear fog lamp, bulb replace‐ RPM, engine 255 Service requirements, dis‐
ment 241 RSC Runflat System Compo‐ play 78
Rear lamps 240 nent, refer to Run-flat Service, Roadside Assis‐
Rear socket 136 tires 229 tance 245
Rearview mirror 54 Rubber components, Settings on Control Dis‐
Rear window defroster 128 care 251 play 76
Recirculated-air mode 127 Run-flat tires 229 Settings, storing for seat, mir‐
Recommended tire rors, steering wheel 53
brands 228 S Shifting, automatic transmis‐
Refueling 222 sion 66
Release tool 237 Safe braking 145 Shifting, manual transmis‐
Remaining range 73 Safety 6 sion 66
Remote control/key 32 Safety belt reminder 50 Short commands 258
Remote control, malfunc‐ Safety belts 49 Shoulder support 48
tion 37 Safety belts, care 251 Side airbags 86
Remote control, rear enter‐ Safety switch, windows 44 Side View 117
tainment 195 Safety systems, airbags 86 Signaling, horn 12
Remote control, univer‐ Satellite radio 174 Signals when unlocking 36
sal 132 Saving fuel 148 Sitting safely 46
Replacement fuse 243 Scale, changing during navi‐ Size 254
Replacing parts 237 gation 162 Ski bag 137
Replacing wheels/tires 227 Slide/tilt glass roof 44
272
Smallest turning circle 255 Storage compartment, remote Theft protection, refer to Cen‐
At a glance
Smoker's package 134 control 141 tral locking system 35
Snap-in adapter, mobile Storage compartments 138 Thermal camera, refer to Night
phone 210 Storage compartments, loca‐ Vision 121
Snow chains 229 tions 138 Thigh support 46
Socket 135 Storage, tires 228 Through-loading system 136
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐ Storing the vehicle 251 Tilt alarm sensor 42
nostics 236 Street, entering for naviga‐ Tilt, seats 46
Spare fuse 243 tion 153 Tire age 227
Controls
Special destinations, naviga‐ Summer tires, tread 227 Tire damage 227
tion 155 Surround View 113 Tire identification marks 225
Specified oil types 233 Suspension settings 98 Tire inflation pressure 224
Speed limit, setting 74 Switch for Dynamic Driving Tire inflation pressure monitor,
Speedometer 14 Control 98 refer to FTM 91
Driving tips
Split screen 23 Switch-on times, parked-car Tire Pressure Monitor
Split screen map set‐ ventilation 131 TPM 88
tings 162 Switch, refer to Cockpit 12 Tires, changing 227
Spoken instructions, naviga‐ Symbols 6 Tires, everything on wheels
tion 161 and tires 224
SPORT+ program, Dynamic T Tires, flat tire 242
Driving Control 99 Tires, run-flat tires 229
Navigation
SPORT program, Dynamic Tachometer 72 Tire tread 227
Driving Control 99 Tail and brake lamps 240 Toll roads, route 160
Sport program, transmis‐ Tailgate 38 Tone 170
sion 67 Tailgate, automatic 39 Tool kit 237
Sports automatic transmis‐ Tailgate via remote control 36 Tools 237
sion 68 Tail lamps 240 Top View 115
Stability control systems 96 Tail lamps, bulb replace‐ Torque, engine 255
Start/Stop button 60 ment 240 Total vehicle weight 256
Start function during malfunc‐ Technical changes, refer to Tow fitting 246
tion 33 Safety 6 Towing 246
Starting aid 245 Technical data 254 Town/city, navigation 152
Starting the engine 60 Telephone 202 Tow-starting 246
State/province, selecting for TeleService 215 Tow truck 248
navigation 152 Temperature, automatic cli‐ TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
Stations, stored 178 mate control 127 tor 88
Station, storing 172 Temperature display, external Traction control 97
Status display, tires 89 temperature 71 TRACTION program, Dynamic
Status information, iDrive 22 Temperature, engine oil 72 Driving Control 97
Status of Owner's Manual 6 Terminal 0 60 Traffic bulletins, naviga‐
Steering, Integral Active Terminal 15 60 tion 163
Steering 98 Terminal R 60 Traffic obstruction, bypass‐
Mobility
Steering wheel, adjusting 55 Terminal, starting aid 245 ing 165

Steering wheel heating 56 Theft alarm system, refer to Traffic situation/gray
Steering wheel memory 53 Alarm system 41 card 164
Steptronic, automatic trans‐ Theft protection, lug Transmission, automatic 66
mission 66 bolts 242 Transmission lock, releas‐
Stopping the engine 61 ing 68
Reference
273
V
Everything from A to Z Transmission, manual 66 Welcome lamps 81
Transporting children Wheel base, vehicle 255
safely 57 Variable Damping Control, re‐ Wheel change 241
Tread, tires 227 fer to Dynamic Damping Wheels, changing 227
Treble, tone 170 Control 97 Wheels, everything on wheels
Trip computer 75 Variable steering, Integral Ac‐ and tires 224
Triple turn signal activa‐ tive Steering 98 Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
tion 64 Vehicle battery 242 FTM 91
Trip odometer 71 Vehicle battery, replacing 242 Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor
Truck for tow-starting/tow‐ Vehicle, breaking in 144 TPM 88
ing 248 Vehicle care 250 Width, vehicle 254
Trunk, expanding 136 Vehicle identification number, Window defroster, rear 128
Trunk lid 38 refer to Identification number Windows, powered 43
Trunk lid, automatic 39 in the engine compart‐ Windshield, climate con‐
Trunk lid, emergency unlock‐ ment 231 trol 145
ing 40 Vehicle jack 242 Windshield washer fluid 66
Trunk lid, hotel function 40 Vehicle paint 250 Windshield washer noz‐
Trunk lid via remote con‐ Vehicle storage 251 zles 65
trol 36 Vehicle wash 249 Windshield washer sys‐
Trunk, storage compart‐ Ventilation 129 tem 64
ments 141 Ventilation, refer to Parked-car Windshield wiper 64
Turning circle 255 ventilation 131 Windshield wipers, fold-out
Turning circle lines, backup Version of navigation position 65
camera 114 data 165 Winter storage, care 251
Turn signals, operation 63 Video playback 181 Winter tires, suitable
Turn signals, rear, bulb re‐ Voice activation, mobile tires 228
placement 240 phone 208 Winter tires, tread 227
Voice activation, short com‐ Wiper blades, replacing 237
U mands 258 Wiper fluid 66
Voice activation system 25 Wiper system 64
Unintentional alarm 42 Volume, setting 170 Wood, care 251
Units of measure 77 Word match concept, naviga‐
Universal remote control 132 W tion 24
Unlock button, automatic Wrench 237
transmission 67 Warning lamps 14
Unlocking/locking from in‐ Warning messages, refer to X
side 38 Check Control 79
Unlocking/locking via door Warning triangle 245 Xenon headlamps, bulb re‐
lock 37 Washer fluid 66 placement 239
Unlocking/locking with remote Washer fluid reservoir, ca‐
control 35 pacity 257 Y
Upholstery care 250 Washer nozzles, wind‐
USB audio interface 191 shield 65 Your individual vehicle 6
USB interface 138 Washer system 64
Washing, vehicle 249
Water on roads 145
Weather Band 173
Weights 256
274
More about BMW
The Ultimate Driving

bmwusa.com Machine
01 41 2604541 ue
*BL260454100K*

2011 5seriessedan Ownersmanual

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

2011 5seriessedan Ownersmanual

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Owner's Manual for

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2604541 - 03 10 500

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2604541 - 03 10 500

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2604541 - 03 10 500

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2604541 - 03 10 500

Using this Owner's Manual Your individual vehicle

sional advice on using these items, are available

Reporting safety defects

All around the steering wheel

1 Seating comfort functions* Night Vision with pedestrian de‐

8 Steering column stalk, left

High-beam assistant* 83 12 Steering column stalk, right

10 Instrument cluster 14 18 Unlock the hood

11 Steering wheel buttons, right

1 Fuel gauge 73 6 Electronic displays 16

Indicator/warning lamps Overview: indicator/warning lamps

Instrument cluster Symbol Function or system

Parking lamps, headlamp control Engine functions

Active Cruise Control* Brake system

Lane departure warning* Antilock Brake System ABS in Cana‐

DSC Dynamic Stability Control

1 Selection list, e.g., radio 73 Computer 73

Central locking system 38

1 Emergency Request* 244 4 Reading lamps* 85

2 Glass sunroof, powered* 44 5 Interior lamps 84

3 Indicator lamp, front passenger

The iDrive combines the functions of a multitude 1. Press the button.

Control Display 2. Press.

▷ Do not place objects close to the Control

Selecting menu items

1. Turn the controller until the desired menu

Press the button Function

MENU Opens the main menu.

RADIO Opens the Radio menu.

Operating concept The previous panel is opened again by

The main menu is displayed.

View of an opened menu

Example: setting the clock

3. If necessary, move the controller to the left

Traffic bulletins* switched on. One of

HD Radio* switched on.

Satellite radio* switched on

Wireless network reception

Wireless network not available*

SIM card* blocked

Status field Enter PIN*

The following information is displayed in the sta‐

▷ Wireless network reception strength. Music collection*

USB audio interface*

Spoken instructions* switched off General information

Switching the split screen on and off Running a function

▷ To display short information: touch the but‐

Press the controller: delete the letter

Press the controller for an extended

Enter a blank space.

Switching between letters and

Enter the letters.

Enter the numbers.

Switching between upper and lower

Move the controller up: switch

Move the controller up: switch

Terminating the voice activation